Skip to main content

Full text of "A popular treatise on photography"

See other formats


A  POPULAR  TREATISE 

OS 

T5  TT  r.  ' "  S\  (\  T>     A    T>  TT  T7 

,    M  -  *   -    r>  yr  Li-  1-.  i 

•  --  -  aOM  Ti'B 
»-*,a.^H  <>*'  U,  VAN  MONCKHOVEN, 

BY  W.   H.   THOENTHWAITE. 


iib  numsrcus  €ngtabiitgs  on  ' 


Price  Is.  Qd. 


VIRTUE  BROTHERS  &  00.,  1,  AMSN  CORNER,  rATEii^CLJTT-:c  How- 


I 


A  POPULAR  TREATISE 


PH  OTOGRAPHY 


A  DESCRIPTION  OF,  AND  REMARKS  ON,  THE 


teflstjfe 


D.  VAN  MONCKHOYEN. 


TRANSLATED  BY  W.  H.  THORNTHWAITE,  PH.D.,  F.G.S. 


faitfc 


mang 


LONDON: 
YIETUE  BROTHERS  &  CO.,  1,  AMEN  CORNER, 

PATERNOSTER  ROW. 
1863. 


Ml 


PREFACE. 


THE  high  repute  of  D.  Yan  Monckhoven  on  the 
Continent  as  a  practical  photographer,  and  the  very 
favourable  reviews  which  his  works  have  from 
time  to  time  received  from  the  leading  photographic 
journals  in  this  country,  have  led  to  the  following 
free  translation  of  his  "  Traite  Populaire  de  Photo- 
graphy sur  Collodion."  The  alterations  and  emen- 
dations which  have  been  made  in  the  original  text, 
it  is  hoped,  will  render  the  whole  more  immediately 
available  to  the  English  reader,  and  acceptable  as  a 
handbook  of  photographic  art. 

W.  H.  THORNTHWAITE. 
April,  1863. 


CONTENTS. 


Chapter  Page 

Introductory 1 

I.  The  plan  followed  in  this  work 6 

II.  On  the  preparation  of  substances  required  in  the  manu- 
facture of  photographic  collodion       .         .         .         .11 

III.  Preparation  of  photographic  collodion  ....       20 

IV.  Cleaning  glass  plates,  &c 25 

V.  On  the  dark  room,  and  photographic  laboratory    .         .28 

VI.  Coating  with  collodion  and  sensitising  the  plate  .  .  30 
VII.  Photographic  cameras,  lenses,  &c.  ....  36 
VIII.  On  the  glass  room  in  which  the  sitter  is  placed,  and  the 

rules  to  be  observed  in  taking  portraits  and  landscapes      48 
IX.  Development  of  the  latent  image  obtained  in  the  camera- 

obscnra 55 

X.  Fixing  and  strengthening  the  negative  image        .        .       64 
XI.  Varnishing  the  picture  .         .         .         .         .         .67 

XII.  The  dry  collodion,  collodio-albumen,  and  tannin  processes     7 1 

XIII.  Positive  collodion  process 84 

XIV.  The  stereoscope 89 

XV.  Printing  positive  proofs 98 

NOTES. 

Appearance  of  negatives 121 

Distillation  of  ether 121 

Preparation  of  pyroxyiine 122 

Employment  of  the  iodides  and  bromides      .        .        .122 

Nitrate  of  silver  stains 123 

Preparation  of  the  nitrate  of  silver  bath         .        .        .     124 

Preparation  of  pyrogallic  acid 124 

Photographic  optics 125 

Spots  on  the  collodion  film   .         .        .         .         .        .130 

Crystallisable  acetic  acid 131 


A    GLANCE 

AT  THE 

PEINCIPAL   PHOTOGRAPHIC    PEOCESSES 

NOW  IN  USE. 


INTRODUCTORY. 

AMONGST  the  various  methods  which  have  been  from  time 
to  time  proposed  for  the  production  of  pictures  by  the 
chemical  agency  of  light,  and  comprehended  under  the 
general  term  Photography,  there  are  only  four — the 
DAGUERREOTYPE,  CALOTYPE,  ALBUMEN,  and  COLLODION 
processes — which  have  been  to  any  extent  practically 
successful. 

The  photographic  piature  is  obtained  in  the — 

Daguerreotype  process,  on  polished  metal  plates ; 
Calotype,  on  paper ; 

Albumen,  on  a  film  of  albumen  on  glass ; 
Collodion,  on  a  film  of  collodion  on  glass. 

And  it  is  an  interesting  fact  that,  although  at  first  sight 
these  processes  do  not  appear  to  have  any  connection  with 
each  other,  there  nevertheless  does  exist  one  general 
principle  of  action,  which  will  be  obvious,  even  to  the 
superficial  observer. 

THE  DAGUERREOTYPE. — This  process  was.  discovered  by 
Niepce  and  Daguerre.  A  silver,  or  silvered  copper,  plate, 
highly  polished,  is  placed  in  the  dark  on  a  china  dish,  con- 
taining iodine.  The  vapour  of  this  substance  combines 
with  the  silver  of  the  metallic  plate  in  such  a  manner  as 
to  produce  iodide  of  silver,  a  substance  sensitive  to  light. 
In  fact,  it  is  sufficient  to  expose  it  behind  a  perforated  card 
in  the  daylight  for  some  considerable  time  to  produce  an 
impression ;  but  should  the  time  of  exposure  be  much 
shortened  there  will  not  be  any  picture  visible  on  the 


&  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

layer  of  iodide  of  silver,  although  such  really  exists,  and 
can  be  developed,  or  made  to  appear.  This  can  be  effected 
by  placing  the  plate  over  mercury  heated  to  about  148° 
Fahr.,  so  that  it  receives  the  vapours  which  arise  there- 
from, when  an  exact  image  of  the  perforated  card  will  be 
apparent  in  a  very  few  seconds.  There  always  remains  a 
certain  quantity  of  iodide  of  silver  which  has  not  been 
altered  by  light,  because  it  has  been  protected  from  the 
action  of  this  agent  by  the  opaque  body  which  covered 
.  the  plate  in  certain  places.  If  this  iodide  of  silver  were 
not  removed,  it  is  easy  to  understand  that  it  would  become 
changed  as  soon  as  exposed  to  the  light ;  and  therefore 
it  is  necessary  to  dissolve  it  by  a  body  which  has  received 
the  name  of  a  fixing  agent.  Many  substances  dissolve 
iodide  of  silver,  such  as  the  various  iodide*,  cyanides,  and 
alkaline  hyposulphites  ;  but  amongst  these  the  most  useful 
is  the  hyposulphite  of  soda. 

The  Daguerreotype  process  just  described  will  be  per- 
ceived to  essentially  consist  of  a  layer  of  iodide  of  silver, 
the  use  of  a  developer  to  bring  out  the  latent  picture,  and 
a  fixing  agent  for  removing  that  portion  of  the  iodide  of 
silver  not  acted  upon  by  the  light. 

THE  CALOTTPE  process  was  the  invention  of  Mr.  Fox 
Talbot,  and,  in  consequence,  is  sometimes  termed  Talbo- 
type.  It  consists  in  spreading,  on  a  sheet  of  paper,  first  a 
solution  of  iodide  of  potassium,  and  then  a  solution  of  nitrate 
of  silver.  These  two  bodies,  by  their  mutual  reaction, 
produce  a  yellowish-white,  insoluble  powder ;  then,  by 
washing  the  paper  in  water  contained  in  a  porcelain  basin, 
all  the  excess  of  nitrate  of  silver  is  carried  away,  and 
finally  there  results  a  paper  the  pores  of  which  are  com- 
pletely impregnated  with  iodide  of  silver.  If  this  iodised 
paper  be  exposed  to  the  light,  behind  a  perforated  card, 
the  iodide  of  silver  will  become  black  at  the  places  where 
the  light  strikes  upon  it ;  or  if  a  very  short  exposure 
be  given  to  the  paper,  on  examination  by  yellow  light  no 
image  will  be  perceived.  The  picture  can,  however,  be 
developed  by  immersing  the  paper  in  an  aqueous  solu- 
tion of  gallic  acid,  mixed  with  a  very  small  quantity  of 
another  aqueous  solution  of  nitrate  of  silver  and  acetic 
acid.  This  mixture  constitutes  Mr.  Talbot's  developer. 


INTRODUCTORY.  O 

At  the  end  of  some  minutes  the  image  shows  itself,  increases 
in  vigour,  and  becomes  very  distinct ;  the  paper  is  then 
removed  from  the  basin  of  gallo  nitrate  of  silver,  washed 
in  water,  and  the  iodide  of  silver  not  affected  by  the  light 
is  dissolved  out  with  a  solution  of  hyposulphite  of  soda. 

The  two  processes  of  Daguerreotype  and  calotype, 
although  employing  such  different  substances  as  metal 
and  paper,  nevertheless  have  many  points  of  resemblance, 
as  in  both  the  pictures  are  obtained  on  iodide  of  silver, 
requiring  development  and  subsequent  fixing ;  but  when 
the  respective  pictures  are  examined,  a  very  important 
difference  will  be  perceived  in  their  general  aspect.  A 
proof  taken  by  the  Daguerreotype  will  exhibit  a  counterpart 
of  the  original,  with  all  the  lights  and  shades  correct.  If 
it  be  a  view  taken  with  the  aid  of  a  camera,  the  sky  will 
appear  white,  the  trees  a  little  darker,  and  the  shadows 
black  as  in  nature ;  and,  in  the  case  of  a  portrait  of  a  person 
standing  before  a  white  wall,  the  picture  of  the  wall  will 
be  white,  the  hair  and  features  differently  tinted,  and  the 
dress  black ;  consequently,  it  is  usual  to  call  this  image 
direct,  or  positive. 

It  is  quite  different  with  the  calotype  picture ;  in  fact, 
the  view  will  have  a  black  sky,  the  trees  lighter,  and  the 
shadows  white  ;  and,  if  it  were  the  portrait,  the  wall  black 
and  the  dress  white ;  or,  in  other  words,  the  picture  will 
in  every  respect,  as  to  depth  of  tint,  be  the  reverse  of  the 
original,  and  for  this  reason  is  called  indirect  or  negative. 

Figs.   1   and  2   give   an    idea  of  these  negative  and 


Fig.  1.  <•         Fig.  2 


positive  images.  Thus  Fig.  1  represents  a  black  cross  on 
a  white  ground.  If  it  be  reproduced  by  the  Daguerreo- 
type an  exact  copy  is  obtained;  whilst  if  the  calotype 
process  be  used,  the  result  will  be  an  inverted  image,  or 
the  cross  will  be  white  on  a  black  ground;  in  fact  a 
B  2 


PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

negative  image,  as  shown  at  Fig.  2.     Figs.  3  and  4  show 
another  example  of  these  negative  and  positive  proofs.* 

There  are  many  drawbacks  against  the  employment  of 
the  Daguerreotype  process ;  for  instance,  the  plate  pos- 
sesses a  dazzling  brightness,  which  forces  the  observer  to 
incline  himself  in  some  favourable  angle  to  be  able  to 
examine  the  details  of  the  picture ;  besides,  it  must  be 
protected  by  glass,  because  the  image  which  it  bears  on  its 
surface  is  destroyed  by  the  least  friction ;  lastly,  and  this 


Fig.  3. 

is  above  all  its  principal  disadvantage,  it  only  gives  a  single 
image,  whilst  the  other  methods  furnish  an  indefinite 
number.  When  a  negative  image  is  once  obtained,  it  can 
be  employed  to  produce  a  series  of  other  images,  which 
will  also  be  reversed  in  relation  to  the  negative,  and  con- 
sequently positives.  Take  for  example  Figs.  3  and  4. 
Suppose  Fig.  3  the  model  to  be  reproduced,  Fig.  4  will  be 
the  negative  image  on  the  paper.  But  if  the  latter  be  laid  on 
another  sensitive  sheet  of  paper,  and  exposed  thus  arranged 

*  Sec  Note  1. 


INTRODUCTORY.  5 

to  the  sun,  its  rays  will  pass  through  the  white  part&;  and 
impress  the  sensitive  paper  which  is  underneath,  but  will 
be  stopped  by  the  black  parts ;  and  thus  will  the  facsimile 
of  Fig.  3  be  produced.  It  will  be  understood  that  the 
same  negative  Fig.  4  can  be  used  as  often  as  required,  and 
an  unlimited  number  of  positives  analogous  to  Fig.  3  thus 
obtained. 

From  the  necessity  and  manner  of  employing  a  paper 
negative  to  produce  the  required  positive  impressions,  a 
very  correct  idea  will  be  formed  of  the  motives  which  have 


Fig.  4. 

led  photographers  to  replace  paper  by  a  more  homogeneous 
substance ;  however  fine  a  surface  paper  may  appear  to 
possess,  if  it  be  examined  by  transmitted  light  it  is  always 
very  uneven  in  texture,  which  circumstance  greatly 
injures  the  delicate  tints  and  sharpness  of  detail  in  the 
positive  proofs. 

THE  ALBUMEN  PROCESS. — The  white  of  an  egg,  other- 
wise called  albumen,  is  a  transparent  liquid,  which,  spread 


O  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

on  a  plate  of  glass,  leaves  by  evaporation  a  coating  as 
clear  as  the  glass  itself,  so  that  when  employed  as  a 
photographic  vehicle  the  most  minute  details  are  preserved 
with  perfect  fidelity. 

The  manner  of  operating  with  albumen  is  exactly  the 
same  as  for  the  negative  paper.  In  the  albumen,  properly 
prepared,  is  dissolved  a  small  quantity  of  iodide  of  potas- 
sium ;  this  is  spread  on  a  well  cleaned  plate  of  glass ;  the 
dried  glass  is  immersed  in  nitrate  of  silver,  exposed  to  the 
light  in  a  camera,  developed  as  a  proof  on  paper,  and  fixed 
by  hyposulphite  of  soda. 

The  advantage  that  albumen  offers  over  paper,  is  the 
production  of  finer  details  in  the  picture.  It  is  not,  how- 
ever, at  all  an  easy  or  sensitive  process,  and  therefore 
unsuitable  for  taking  portraits,  as  at  least  ten  minntes 
exposure  is  required,  even  in  a  very  good  light,  to  pro- 
duce an  impression. 

THE  COLLODION  PROCESS,  which  employs  a  film  of 
collodion  spread  on  glass,  possesses  all  the  good  qualities 
of  albumen,  with  the  very  great  advantage  of  being,  at 
least,  sixty  times  more  sensitive,  and  withal  easier  of 
execution.  It  is  this  process,  and  the  subjects  imme- 
diately connected  therewith,  that  will  be  treated  upon  in 
the  following  chapters. 


CHAPTER  I. 

THE    PLAN    FOLLOWED    IN    THIS    WORK. 

IN  this  chapter  it  is  intended  to  give  a  brief  summary  of 
the  subjects  to  be  subsequently  described  in  detail  under 
their  several  heads. 

If  a  little  pyroxyline  or  gun-cotton  be  immersed  in 
a  mixture  of  about  one  part  in  volume  of  alcohol,  and  two 
parts  of  ether,  it  will  almost  entirely  dissolve.  In  order 
to  obtain  a  sufficiently  transparent  solution,  it  must  stand 
for  twenty -four  hours  in  a  bottle  well  corked,  and  then 
be  poured  out  into  another  bottle,  taking  care  not  to  dis- 


THE    PLAN    FOLLOWED    IN    THIS    WORK.  t 

turb  the  thick  part  which  remains  at  the  bottom.  This 
clear  liquid  is  collodion. 

If  a  small  quantity  of  collodion  be  poured  on  a  glass  well 
cleaned,  the  ether  and  alcohol  will  evaporate,  and  leave  on 
the  glass  a  transparent  film.  This  film  is  very  firm,  and 
adheres  strongly  to  the  glass  ;  it  is  that  which  serves  as  a 
vehicle  for  the  photographic  materials;  or,  in  clearer  terms, 
it  is  that  which  is  destined  to  form  the  surface  which  will 
retain  the  photographic  image.  It  may  easily  be  con- 
ceived that  for  the  purpose  of  rendering  this  film  sen- 
sitive to  light,  iodide  of  silver  must  be  formed  in  its 
texture  ;  this  is  done  by  dissolving  iodide  of  potassium, 
or  some  other  iodide,  in  the  collodion. 

It  is  important  to  choose  a  proper  iodide,  but  for  the 
present  purpose  the  use  of  a  collodion  containing  iodide 
of  potassium  will  suffice  to  trace  what  results  and  changes 
take  place.  On  a  well-cleaned  glass  plate  pour  a  certain 
quantity  of  collodion  in  such  a  manner  as  to  cause  it  to 
flow  over  its  surface ;  then  incline  the  plate,  that  the 
excess  of  liquid  may  flow  off.  After  the  ether  and  alcohol 
are  evaporated, — or,  in  other  terms,  after  the  plate  has 
become  dry, — a  coating  of  pyroxyline  will  be  obtained ; 
but  this  time  it  will  have  an  iodide  intimately  mingled 
with  it. 

In  proportion  as  more  or  less  gun  -cotton  is  dissolved 
in  the  mixture  of  ether  and  alcohol,  a  liquid  of  greater 
or  less  density  is  obtained,  and  consequently  the  thickness 
of  coating  of  pyroxyline  will  also  vary  on  the  glass.  The 
proportion  of  iodide  added  to  the  collodion  also  regulates 
the  quantity  which  remains  on  the  glass ;  from  which  it 
follows  that  it  is  not  a  matter  of  indifference  what  formula 
is  employed  in  its  preparation  :  on  the  contrary,  it  is 
necessary  to  study  with  the  greatest  care  the  relative  quan- 
tities of  the.  chemical  substances  which  constitute  photo- 
graphic collodion.  These  quantities  will  depend  upon  the 
temperature,  and  yet  more  upon  the  results  desired  to 
be  obtained. 

The  glass  plate  having  the  collodion  spread  over  it,  is 
now  sensitised  by  being  dipped  into  a  solution  of  nitrate 
of  silver,  which  converts  the  iodide  of  potassium  into 
iodide  of  silver,  sensitive  to  light. 

It  need  hardly  be  mentioned  that  the  iodide  of  silver 


8  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

being  affected  by  light,  the  preceding  operation  of  sensitis- 
ing ought  to  be  done  in  the  dark.  This  word  ought  not 
always  to  be  taken  literally ;  in  photography,  we  under- 
stand by  darkness  a  light  too  feeble  to  affect  the  sensitive 
coating.  A  wax  candle  is  generally  used,  or  ordinary 
daylight  neutralised  by  a  yellow  glass;  for  a  glass  of 
this  colour  prevents  any  action  on  photographic  sub- 
stances. 

The  sensitised  plate  now  requires  to  be  placed  in  a 
camera,  an  apparatus  composed  of  a  box  of  wood  and  an 
arrangement  of  lenses,  which  possess  the  property  of 
forming  with  perfect  accuracy  an  image  of  any  required 
object  on  the  sensitised  plate.  As  a  general  rule,  the  col- 
lodion plate  is  left  in  this  apparatus  from  ten  to  twenty 
seconds,  according  to  the  brightness  of  the  object ;  it  is 
then  removed,  and  taken  back  into  the  dark  room. 

If  at  this  moment  the  collodion  film  be  examined  with 
attention,  no  trace  of  an  image  will  be  perceived,  but  it 
can  be  made  to  appear  in  the  same  manner  as  has  before 
been  mentioned,  by  developing  with  gallic  acid.  There 
are  also  many  other  developers  for  bringing  out  the  latent 
image,  such  as  pyro -gallic  acid,  proto -sulphate  of  iron, 
proto -sulphate  of  uranium,  &c.  Whatever  the  developer 
may  be  that  is  used,  it  is  dissolved  in  water,  and  poured 
over  the  coated  surface  of  the  glass.  In  a  few  seconds 
the  image  appears  as  a  negative,  and  the  reduction  is 
allowed  to  proceed  ;  or,  in  other  terms,  the  proof  left  to 
darken,  until  it  is  judged  to  be  sufficiently  distinct.  The 
glass  is  then  plunged  into  water,  which  removes  all  soluble 
substances,  then  into  a  fixing  solution,  such  as  cyanide  of 
potassium,  or  hyposulphite  of  soda,  which  dissolves  the 
semi-opaque  coating  of  iodide  of  silver  ;  finally,  the  glass 
is  washed  in  a  current  of  cold  water,  and  dried  in  the  air. 

If  the  proof  be  examined  by  transmitted  light,  it  will 
be  found  to  be  a  true  negative  ;  that  is  to  say,  supposing 
a  view  has  been  taken,  the  sky,  the  white  houses,  and 
in  general  all  objects  strongly  illuminated,  are  shown  of 
a  black  colour;  while  dark  objects,  on  the  contrary,  ap- 
pear transparent  (Figs.  3  and  4). 

The  use  of  such  a  negative  as  before'  mentioned, 
is  to  give  a  number  of  other  proofs  either  upon  glass 
or  upon  paper ;  and  if  the  tints  be  in  good  harmony 


THE    PLAN    FOLLOWED    IN    THIS    WORK. 


with   the  original  model,  a  satisfactory  picture  will  be 
obtained. 

To  understand  the  above  requires  a  proper  compre- 
hension of  the  principle,  that  in  spite  of  the  opposition 
of  lights  and  shades  shown  in  a  negative,  with  respect  to 
a  given  model,  there  must  nevertheless  be  preserved  a 
perfect  harmony  between  the  tints.  This  phrase  may 
appear  obscure,  but  a  well  selected  example  will  make  it 
clear.  Suppose  a  series  of  ten  bands  be  fixed  on  a  wall, 
of  which  the  first  is  absolutely  black,  the  last  perfectly 
white,  and  the  others  of  intermediate  tints.  The  first  will 
then  be  black,  the  second  of  a  greyish  black,  the  third  a 
little  less  dark,  the  fourth  still  less,  and  thus  lighter  and 
lighter,  to  the  perfectly  white. 

If  a  corresponding  figure  be  reproduced  on  collodion, 
it  will  be  found,  if  the  nega- 
tive be  a  good  one,  that  these 
ten  tints  are  completely  in- 
verted. In  the  place  of  the 
first  black  tint  of  the  model, 
will  be  one  perfectly  trans- 
parent on  the  negative,  whilst 
the  last  will  be  of  an  opaque 
black,  the  intermediate  ones 
having  a  regular  gradation  ;  for 
if  it  were  otherwise,  a  proof 
taken  from  such  a  negative 
would  not  represent  the  true  shades  of  the  original  model. 
The  Figs.  5  and  6  are  intended  to  show  this  effect  on 
three  bands ;  but  the  result  would  be  analogous  for  any 
larger  series. 

The  conditions  necessary  to  obtain  this  exactitude  are, 
that  the  coating  of  collodion,  be  of  proper  thickness,  and 
sufficiently  furnished  with  iodide  of  silver  to  yield  a  de- 
composition of  such  intensity  as  to  produce  a  thick  coating 
of  reduced  material ;  for  if  the  light  has  not  been  able  to 
decompose  enough  iodide  in  the  coating  of  collodion,  a 
perfect  black  can  never  be  produced.  It  follows,  then,  to 
obtain  an  intense  negative,  there  must  be  employed  a  thick 
collodion  strongly  iodised,  and  a  concentrated  bath  of 
nitrate  of  silver. 

The  foregoing  are  the  general  details  for  producing 
B  3 


Figs.  5  and  6. 


10  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

negatives  upon  collodion.  This  process,  however,  like 
that  of  the  Daguerreotype,  can  be  made  to  "give  direct  or 
positive  proofs  at  one  operation ;  but  in  that  case  the 
picture  requires  to  be  viewed  by  reflected,  instead  of  by 
transmitted,  light. 

All  the  operations  necessary  to  obtain  a  negative  upon 
collodion  require  to  be  performed  in  rapid  succession.  But 
if  it  be  wished  to  delay  the  exposure  and  development 
of  the  picture  for  some  time  after  sensitising  the  plate,  it 
is  re -coated  with  gelatine,  or  other  suitable  substance. 
The  advantage  of  this  method  of  operating,  besides 
allowing  some  time  to  elapse  between  the  exposure  and 
development,  is  that  it  does  not  require  the  whole  of  the 
materials  to  be  taken  to  the  place  where  it  is  wished  to 
operate ;  and  consequently,  although  much  less  sensitive 
than  wet  collodion,  is  very  applicable  for  views,  &c.  This 
method  is  known  by  the  name  of  the  Dry  Collodion  Process. 

Some  remarks  on  the  stereoscope,  an  instrument  par- 
ticularly adapted  for  viewing  photographic  pictures,  and 
full  details  for  printing  positive  proofs  from  collodion 
negatives,  and  a  few  notes  on  optical  photography  and 
other  photographic  subjects,  will  complete  the  work. 

The  following  is  a  list  of  the  subjects  treated  on  in  the 
respective  chapters  : — 

CHAPTER 

II.  The  Preparation  of  the  Substances  required  in  the  manufacture 
of  Photographic  Collodion. 

III.  The  Preparation  of  Photographic  Collodion. 

IV.  Cleaning  the  Glasses. 

Y.  The  Dark  Room,  or  Photographic  Laboratory. 
VI.  Coating  with  Collodion  and  Sensitising  the  Plate. 
VII.  Photographic  Cameras,  Lenses,  &c. 
VIII.  The  Glass  or  Operating  Room,  and  the  Rules  for  taking  Views 

and  Portraits. 

IX.  Development  of  the  Image  obtained  in  the  Camera. 
X.  Fixing  and  Strengthening  the  Negative  Image. 
XI.  Varnishing  the  Collodion  Coating. 

XII.  Dry   Collodion,    including  the   Collodio-Albumen  and  Tannin 
Processes. 

XIII.  Positive  Collodion  Process. 

XIV.  The  Stereoscope. 

XV.  Printing  Positive  Proofs. 

Notes  on  Optical  Photography  and  other  Photographic  Subjects. 


PKEPARATION    OP    SUBSTANCES    FOR    COLLODION.        11 


CHAPTER  II. 


ON  THE  PREPARATION  OF  SUBSTANCES  REQUIRED  IN  THE 
MANUFACTURE  OF  PHOTOGRAPHIC  COLLODION. 

A  MIXTURE  of  alcohol,  sulphuric  ether,  and  gun-cotton 
forms  a  liquid  called  plain  collodion,  to  which  is  added, 
to  render  it  suitable  for  photographic  purposes,  an  iodide 
or  bromide ;  it  is  then  termed  iodised  or  sensitised  col- 
lodion. 

1.  Alcohol. 

Spirits  of  wine,  or  alcohol,  is  a  liquid  well  known,  and  can 
generally  be  procured  sufficiently  pure  for  photographic 
purposes  ;  it  boils  at  about  172°  Fahr.,  and  burns  with 
a  bluish  flame  without  leaving  a  residue.  One  hundred 
ounces  by  weight  of  alcohol  measure  about  125  fluid  ounces, 
and  100  fluid  ounces  weigh  about  80  ounces.  It  should 
be  perfectly  clear,  transparent,  and  absolutely  free  from 
any  floating  impurities ;  should  it  be  otherwise,  it  must  be 
carefully  filtered.  The  operation  of  filtering,  applicable 
to  other  liquids  as  well  as  alcohol,  is  thus  performed.  A 
circular  sheet  of  filtering  paper  is  first  folded. in  two,  as 


Figs.  7,  8,  9,  10.  Method  of  folding  Filtering 
Papers. 


Fig.  11.  Apparatus  for 
Filtering. 


represented  by  Figs.  7  and  8 ;  then  a  new  fold  is  made  in 
the  middle,  Fig.  9  ;  the  filter  is  then  opened  out,  as  shown 


12 


PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 


at  Fig.  10,  and  placed  in  a  funnel,  6,  furnished  with  its 
support,  Fig.  11.     The  alcohol  or  other  fluid 
to  be  filtered,  is  poured  carefully  into  the  fil- 
tering paper,  through  which  it  will  pass  per- 
fectly clear.     Should  the  first  portion  that 
runs  through  not  be  quite  bright,  it  must  be 
returned  to  the  filter.     When  a  very  rapid 
Fig.  12.  Plaited  filtration  is  desired,  the  filter  paper  may  be 
folded  into  a  number  of  plaits,  as  shown  at 
Fig.  12,  which  affords  a  larger  surface  of  paper  for  the 
liquid  to  pass  through. 

The  strength  of  alcohol  is  conveniently  ascertained  by 
a  specific  gravity  hydrometer.  This  instrument  is  formed 
of  glass,  Fig.  14.  It  consists  of  a  glass  bulb  with  a  glass 
stem  attached  at  the  top,  and  a  smaller  bulb  filled  with 
mercury,  to  serve  as  a  counterpoise  at  the  bottom.  In 
the  stem  is  placed  a  graduated  scale  of  specific  gravities, 
and  the  whole  is  so  arranged  that  when 
placed  in  pure  distilled  water,  the  instru- 
ment floats,  and  the  surface  of  the  water  is 
coincident  with  0  or  I'OOO  on  the  scale.  When 
placed  in  alcohol  or  any  fluid  lighter  than 
water,  the  hydrometer  sinks  according  to  its 
strength  or  specific  gravity.  A  test-glass  or 
cylinder,  Fig.  13,  is  used  to  hold  a  sample  of 
the  alcohol  or  other  liquid  to  be  tested,  and 
care  must  be  taken  when  the  hydrometer  is 
placed  in  it  that  it  floats  perfectly  free  in  the 
fluid,  and  that  no  air  bubbles  attach  them- 
selves to  its  surface.  The  specific  gravity  is 
then  immediately  indicated  by  noting  the 
degree  cut  by  the  surface  of  the  fluid.  Alcohol,  suitable 
for  photographic  purposes,  should  not  have  a  greater 
specific  gravity  than  *819.  Its  best  strength  is  about 
•803  to  -810. 

2.  Ether. 

It  is  comparatively  easy  to  procure  alcohol  of  sufficient 
purity  for  photographic  use,  to  what  it  is  to  obtain  pure 
sulphuric  ether.  Wlien  manufactured  on  a  large  scale  for 
ordinary  pharmaceutical  purposes,  there  is  generally  so 


Figs.  13, 14. 
Hydrometer 
and  Glass. 


PREPARATION    OF    SUBSTANCES    FOR    COLLODION.        13 

little  care  taken,  that  the  ether  becomes  contaminated  with 
eulphovinic  acid,  aldehyde,  or,  worse  than  all,  a  peculiar 
principle  resembling  ozone,  which  is  capable  of  decom- 
posing iodides  and  liberating  free  iodine,  therefore  highly 
detrimental  to  its  photographic  action.  The  formation 
of  this  substance  is  much  accelerated  by  the  joint  action 
of  air  and  light ;  the  knowledge  of  this  circumstance  is, 
therefore,  of  some  importance  to  photographers,  as  it 
indicates  a  very  necessary  precaution  to  be  taken  to  keep 
ether,  and  liquids  containing  it,  particularly  collodion,  in 
well  filled  and  closed  bottles. 

Sulphuric  ether  is  a  colourless  liquid,  and  very  volatile ; 
when  poured  into  water  it  floats  about  like  oil,  and  a  very 
small  quantity  is  dissolved.  It  is  much  lighter  than  water, 
100  ounces  by  weight  of  ether  being  equal  in  volume 
to  135  ounces  by  weight  of  water.  Ether  is  tested  as  to 
its  strength  by  the  specific  gravity  hydrometer,  in  the 
same  manner  as  described  for  alcohol  on  the  opposite  page. 
It  should  have  a  specific  gravity  of  "750  to  *720  to  be  of 
any  use  in  photography. 

In  consequence  of  the  highly  volatile  nature  of  ether, 
and  its  vapour  being  very  explosive  when  mixed  with 
atmospheric  air,  it  is  necessary,  to  prevent  accidents,  to 
avoid  pouring  ether  from  one  vessel  to  another  in  a 
close  room,  or  in  proximity  to  a  fire,  or  flame.  As 
the  vapour  of  ether  is  much  heavier  than  the  air,  it 
naturally  tends  to  fall,  and  therefore  it  is  a  proper 
precaution  to  take,  when  employing  ether  or  fluids  con- 
taining it — as  collodion,  for  example — by  artificial  light, 
to  have  the  source  of  light  situated  at  some  distance 
above  the  vessel  from  which  the  ether  or  collodion  is 
poured. 

Ether,  if  not  sufficiently  pure  for  photographic  purposes, 
can  generally  be  made  available  by  the  following  method 
of  rectification : — 

Into  a  tall  bottle,  Fig.  15,  is  to  be  poured  the  ether  to 
be  purified,  together  with  one-fourth  of  its  volume  of 
water,  and  the  opening  closed  with  a  cork ;  the  whole  is 
then  strongly  agitated,  and  left  to  settle  for  some  few 
minutes.  Two  layers  of  liquid  will  be  perceived,  the 
under  layer  being  water  slightly  etherised,  and  the  upper 
ether.  The  cork  is  now  removed,  and  the  shorter  end 


14: 


PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 


Fig.  16.     Fig.  15. 


of  an  ordinary  glass  syphon,  having  a  small  bore,  and 
previously  filled  with  water,  is  introduced  through  the 
neck  of  the  bottle,  and  quite  to  the  bottom  of  the  liquid. 
The  smallness  of  the  bore,  and 
keeping  the  finger  over  the 
longer  end  of  the  tube,  will 
enable  the  above  to  be  done 
with  facility,  without  the  water 
from  the  syphon  running  out. 
The  finger  being  removed,  the 
syphon  begins  to  act,  and  the 
etherised  water  from  the  bottom 
of  the  bottle  is  quickly  drawn 
off.  When  the  under  layer  has 
nearly  disappeared,  the  orifice 
of  the  tube  is  again  stopped  with  the  finger,  and  the 
syphon  removed. 

A  fresh  quantity  of  water  is  now  poured  into  the 
bottle  containing  the  ether,  which  is  again  agitated  and 
drawn  off  by  the  syphon  as  before  explained. 

This  operation  is  called  "  washing,"  and  the  ether  after 
this  process  is  called  "  washed  ether." 

If  bent  glass  tubes  can  be  conveniently  made  or 
obtained,  the  following  arrangement  may  be  found  more 
convenient  than  the  ordinary  syphon,  it  is  shown  at 
Fig.  17  :  A,  the  bottle  where  the  ether 
and  water  is  shaken  together ;  it  is  fur- 
nished with  a  good  cork  pierced  with  two 
holes,  in  one  of  which  is  fitted  a  narrow 
tube  (a)  about  §ths  of  an  inch  internal 
diameter,  and  in  the  other,  a  curved 
syphon  tube  (6),  of  which  the  shorter 
end  inside  the  bottle  reaches  to  the 
bottom.  If  the  cork  be  properly  fitted, 
it  is  only  necessary  to  blow  slightly 
through  the  tube  (a)  to  cause  the 
liquid  to  rise  in  the  tube  (6)  and  flow 
over.  When  nearly  the  whole  of  the 
underlay er  of  liquid  has  passed  over,  the 
syphon  is  stopped  with  the  finger,  the 
cork  removed,  and  the  fresh  quantity  of  water  added, 
and  the  operation  gone  through  a  second  time. 


Fig.  11.  Bottle  with 
Syphon. 


PREPARATION    OF    SUBSTANCES    FOR    COLLODION.        15 

The  ether  having  been  well  washed,  now  requires  to 
be  dried  and  distilled ;  this  is  done  by  pouring  the  ether 
remaining  in  the  washing  bottle  into  a  distilling  vessel 
containing  some  few  pieces  of  quicklime. 

A  convenient  arrangement  of  apparatus  for  the  distil- 
lation of  small  quantities  of  ether,  is  shown  at  Fig.  18 ; 
where  larger  quantities  are  operated  on,  the  glass  retort 
should  be  replaced  by  a  vessel  of  zinc  or  tin  plate.  A  is 
a  small  furnace  for' charcoal,  B  a  vessel  of  copper  or  iron 
of  some  convenient  form,  to  hold  a  small  quantity  of  water, 
C  a  glass  retort  or  other  vessel,  the  opening  of  which 
is  attached,  by  means  of  a  cork,  to  a  small  leaden  tube 
about  the  thickness  of  the  little  finger,  and  1 J  yards  long  ; 


Fig.  18.  Apparatus  lor  distilling  Ether. 

a  portion  of  this  tube  is  surrounded  by  another  about 
2  inches  in  diameter,  and  f  ths  of  a  yard  long ;  the  top  and 
bottom  of  this  tube  is  closed  perfectly  water-tight  round 
the  smaller  tube,  it  has  also  an  overflow  tube  (a)  at  the 
top  part, -and  a  funnel  and  tube  (6)  at  the  bottom, 
through  which  a  stream  of  cold  water  can  be  passed 
from  any  convenient  vessel,  as  F,  and  discharged  into  the 
receptacle  H.  The  end  of  the  small  leaden  tube  is  bent 
so  as  to  dip  into  a  perfectly  clean  bottle  (G)  ;  in  every 
other  respect  the  figure  will  convey  a  correct  idea  of  the 
construction  of  the  apparatus. 

When  about  to  be  used,  each  separate   part  of  the 
apparatus  should  be  perfectly  cleaned  and  washed  out 


16  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

with  water,  and  arranged  as  described  and  shown  in  the 
cut.  The  glass  retort  (0)  or  other  vessel,  is  filled  for 
about  one -fourth  its  volume,  with  small  pieces  of  quick- 
lime, and  the  washed  ether  poured  on  to  it  until  two- 
thirds  of  the  bulk  of  the  retort  is  filled ;  the  end  of  the 
leaden  tube  is  then  attached  to  the  neck  of  the  retort,  and 
the  refrigerator  E  D  arranged  in  an  inclined  position, 
and  firmly  fixed  by  its  support  (d)  so  that  the  bent  end 
of  the  tube  dips  into  the  mouth  of  the  bottle,  G,  which 
is  to  receive  the  distilled  ether.  The  whole  being  thus 
arranged,  a  small  quantity  of  water  is  poured  into  the 
vessel  B,  so  that  the  lower  portion  of  the  retort  0  is 
immersed  in  it,  forming  what  is  called  a  water  bath; 
some  lighted  charcoal  is  now  placed  in  the  furnace  A, 
and  the  water  in  the  vessel  B  becoming  heated,  com- 
municates its  heat  to  the  ether  in  the  retort,  which  begins 
to  evaporate,  and  in  a  short  time  drops  of  ether  appear 
at  the  bottom  of  the  leaden  tube,  and  the  distillation 
begins.*  The  water  in  the  vessel  B  gets  more  and  more 
heated  as  the  bulk  of  ether  in  the  retort  diminishes,  until 
no  more  drops  are  perceived  to  fall  from  the  end  of  the 
tube ;  the  fire  is  now  removed,  the  apparatus  separated, 
and  the  retort  (0)  or  other  vessel  at  once  cleaned  out, 
for  should  this  be  delayed,  it  becomes  very  difficult  of 
performance. 

The  heat  of  the  fire  must  be  kept  as  much  as  possible 
from  the  bottle  (G)  containing  the  distilled  ether,  and  a 
current  of  very  cold  water  passed  through  the  refrigerator 
E  D,  otherwise  the  ether  vapour  is  not  condensed.  Sul- 
phuric ether,  rectified  in  the  manner  described,  although 
not  absolutely  and  chemically  pure,  is  nevertheless  well 
adapted  for  photographic  purposes. 

3.   Gun-cotton. 

Gun-cotton,  also  termed  "  pyroxyline,"  is  nothing  more 
than  ordinary  cotton  combined  with  peroxide  of  nitrogen. 
It  can  be  prepared  by  plunging  cotton  wool  for  a  few 
minutes  into  concentrated  nitric  acid,  then  washed  in 
water  and  dried;  but  in  order  to  obtain  a  good  pyroxy- 
line for  photographic  purposes,  a  particular  process  must 

*  See  Note  2. 


PREPARATION  OF  SUBSTANCES  FOR  COLLODION.    17 

be  followed,  and  a  rigorous  attention  paid  to  each 
separate  detail.  Gun-cotton  in  appearance  much  re- 
sembles ordinary  cotton,  but  it  is  heavier,  and  its  fibres 
break  more  easily  ;  it  possesses  also  a  slightly  yellow  tint, 
which  resembles  that  of  raw  cotton  as  imported  into 
Europe  from  the  colonies.  It  is  insoluble  in  water, 
alcohol,  pure  ether,  sulphuret  of  carbon,  or  chloroform, 
but  it  dissolves  in  acetate  of  ethyle  and  methyle,  methylic 
alcohol,  acetone,  and  also  in  alcoholised  ether. 

Pyroxyline  burns  with  violence  when  brought  in  con- 
tact with  any  flame ;  so  much  so  as  in  many  instances  to 
answer  the  purpose  of  common  gunpowder. 

The  solution  of  gun-cotton  in  alcoholised  ether  is  called 
collodion,  and  is  employed  in  surgery  and  photography ; 
but  for  this  latter  purpose  it  requires  to  be  specially 
manufactured. 

The  following  is  the  method  of  preparing  gun-cotton  for 
photography,  although  we  strongly  recommend  its  being 
purchased  ready  made,  as  photography  being  now  so  ex- 
tensively employed,  gun-cotton  is  prepared  on  a  large 
scale,  and  at  a  low  price. 

In  a  porcelain  mortar  is  placed  2  ozs.  of  saltpetre  in 
fine  powder,  and  over  it  is  poured  3  ozs.  by  weight  of 
sulphuric  acid  of  commerce.  With  the  pestle,  or  a  large 
glass  tube,  the  materials  are  well  mixed,  so  as  to  obtain 
a  homogeneous  paste.  In  this  is  immersed,  in  successive 
portions,  £  oz.  of  carded  cotton,  free  from  any  mechanical 
impurities.  The  cotton  is  pressed  down  with  the  pestle 
until  thoroughly  wetted  and  imbedded  in  the  liquid  paste. 
The  mortar  is  then  covered  with  a  plate,  to  prevent  the 
nitrous  vapours  which  are  given  off  from  vitiating  the  air 
of  the  laboratory.  It  is  also  advisable  to  perform  this 
operation,  if  possible,  in  the  open  air. 

The  cotton  is  left  in  this  mixture  for  ten  minutes; 
the  mortar  is  then  placed  in  an  inclined  position,  and 
water  poured  into  it,  at  the  same  time  pressing  the  cotton 
with  the  pestle  so  as  rapidly  to  remove  the  excess  of  acid. 
After  washing  for  a  half  minute  in  this  manner,  it  is  taken 
up  with  the  hands  and  thrown  into  a  wooden  tub  filled 
with  water,  and  well  kneaded ;  or  else  held  under  a  water- 
cock,  and  constantly  worked  about,  and  from  time  to  time 
pressed  strongly  between  the  hands.  This  washing  should 


18  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PPtOCESSES. 

be  thoroughly  done,  until  a  portion  of  the  cotton,  when  put 
in  contact  with  blue  litmus  paper,*  does  not  produce  a  red 
stain.  It  is  then  strongly  pressed,  and  left  to  dry  in  the 
air  or  in  the  sun,  having  previously  spread  it  out  thinly, 
so  as  to  present  a  large  surface  to  the  air.  When  the 
cotton  is  dry  it  is  preserved  in  glass  bottles,  well  stopped. 
Gun-cotton,  thus  prepared,  very  often  gives  traces  of  sul- 
phate of  potass  ;  but  as  this  substance  is  absolutely  inso- 
luble in  ether  and  alcohol,  it  is  of  no  importance. 

Large  quantities  of  gun-cotton  should  not  be  bought 
or  prepared  at  one  time,  as  it  appears  to  be  liable  to 
decompose  by  keeping. 

Gun-cotton,  or  pyroxyline,  can  be  prepared  according 
to  the  formula  given  above  from  paper,  linen,  or  hemp ; 
but  these  preparations  have  not  been  sufficiently  studied 
for  us  to  recommend  their  employment  in  photography. 

At  the  end  of  this  volume  (JSfote  3)  some  details  are 
given  relative  to  the  manufacture  of  gun-cotton  on  a  large 
scale  by  a  mixture  of  nitric  and  sulphuric  acids.  In 
general,  the  gun-cotton  so  prepared  is  less  soluble  than 
that  which  has  just  been  described ;  it,  however,  yields 
an  excellent  collodion,  especially  adapted  for  coating  large 
plates,  from  its  being  very  adherent. 

Gun-cotton  was  discovered  by  M.  Schonbein,  a  Ger- 
man chemist,  in  1846.  The  photographic  process  which 
employs  collodion  as  its  basis  was  first  described  by 
Mr.  Archer,  in  England,  in  1851.  M.  Schonbein  prepared 
gun-cotton  by  steeping  cotton  in  monohydrated  nitric 
acid.  Afterwards  M.  Meynier  discovered  the  advantage 
of  using  a  mixture  of  concentrated  nitric  and  sulphuric 
acids,  and  the  method  of  preparation  with  saltpetre  and 

*  Blue  litmus  paper  is  turned  red  by  acids ;  red  litmus  paper  is  turned 
blue  by  alkalies.  These  two  papers  can  be  bought  ready  prepared,  or 
they  can  be  made  in  the  following  way : — Half  a  pound  of  litmus,  in 
small  cakes,  is  boiled  in  an  iron  vessel-  with  one  quart  of  water  for  some 
minutes,  and  then  poured  through  a  fine  piece  of  linen,  to  separate  the 
undissolved  portion.  This  solution  is  spread  over  paper  by  means  of  a 
camel's  hair  brush,  and  the  blue  paper  thus  obtained  hung  over  a  cord  to 
dry.  To  make  the  red  paper,  a  small  quantity  of  vinegar  is  added  to  the 
foregoing  blue  liquid  until  it  becomes  of  a  reddish  colour.  It  is  best  to 
cover  the  paper  on  both  sides,  and  to  cut  it  into  small  bands,  which 
should  be  kept  in  closed  bottles,  so  as  to  prevent  the  action  of  acid  or 
alkaline  vapours. 


PREPARATION    OP    SUBSTANCES    FOR    COLLODION.       19 

sulphuric  acid  is  due  to  M.  Marc  Antoine  Gaudin,  calcu- 
lator in  the  Bureau  des  Longitudes  of  France. 

In  connection  with  the  method  of  preparing  collodion, 
presently  to  be  described,  will  be  indicated  some  other 
important  points  as  further  guides  to  the  selection  or 
manufacture  of  a  good  gun-cotton. 

4.   The  Iodides  and  Bromides  employed  in  the  Prepara- 
tion of  Photographic  Collodion. 

A  great  number  of  iodides,  bromides,  and  their  com- 
pounds have  been  at  various  times  proposed  for  sensitising 
collodion,  but  the  formula  most  to  be  recommended  is  a 
mixture  of  iodide  and  bromide  of  cadmium.  In  Note  4 
will  be  found  some  remarks  on  the  employment  of  the 
iodides  and  bromides  of  potassium  and  ammonium. 

Cadmium  is  now  easily  procured,  almost  in  a  pure  state, 
and  at  a  comparatively  cheap  price.  This  metal  is  generally 
found  in  commerce  in  small  cylindrical  ingots,  about  four 
inches  in  length,  and  one -fourth  in  diameter.  Its  purity 
can  be  known  by  its  making  a  ringing  crackling  noise 
when  bent,  like  tin.  If  it  bends  with  difficulty,  and  pro- 
duces no  sound  when  bent,  it  contains  some  other  metals, 
usually  copper  and  zinc. 

Iodine  is  a  crystalline  substance,  having  the  aspect  of 
black-lead,  or  plumbago,  volatile  at  a  slight  increase  of 
temperature,  giving  off  purple  vapours,  highly  corrosive, 
and  irritating  to  the  eyes ;  it  should  always  be  preserved 
in  glass-stoppered  bottles.  It  is  obtained  from  the  ashes 
of  burnt  sea-weeds. 

Bromine. — This  substance  is  obtained  from  sea-water, 
after  all  the  common  salt  has  been  removed  by  boiling. 
It  is  a  very  dense,  dark  red  liquid ;  its  vapour  is  highly 
injurious  and  corrosive,  and,  from  its  great  volatility,  is 
always  kept  under  a  stratum  of  water  or  sulphuric  acid, 
and  in  glass-stoppered  bottles.  Both  iodine  and  bromine 
are  easily  procured  from  any  chemist. 

Iodide  of  cadmium  is  thus  prepared  : — In  a  glass  flask, 
containing  a  quart  of  water,  at  first  put  in  8  ozs.  of  iodine, 
and  immediately  after  4  ozs.  of  cadmium  in  small  pieces. 
The  flask  is  placed  on  a  stove,  moderately  heated,  in  such 
a  manner  that  the  water  in  the  flask  shall  be  kept  only 


20  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

warm,  not  boiling.  At  the  end  of  a  few  hours,  especially 
if  shaken  from  time  to  time,  the  liquid,  from  red,  which  it 
was  at  first,  will  become  entirely  colourless.  Leave  it 
to  cool,  and  then  filter.  The  cadmium  that  remains  may 
be  used  for  another  operation. 

The  solution  of  iodide  of  cadmium  thus  obtained,  is 
evaporated  in  a  porcelain  capsule.  After  a  certain  time 
crystals  will  appear  in  the  liquid.  It  is  then  placed  on  a 
very  hot  store,  where  all  the  water  is  driven  off,  and  a  dry 
mass  obtained.  The  resulting  substance  is  detached  from 
the  capsule  with  a  knife,  then  reduced  to  a  fine  powder 
in  a  mortar,  and  finally  preserved  in  a  stoppered  bottle. 

The  iodide  of  cadmium  thus  prepared  is  of  a  yellow  tint, 
very  soluble  in  water  and  alcohol,  but  less  soluble  in  ether. 

Bromide  of  cadmium  is  made  by  pouring  6  ozs.  of 
bromine  into  1  quart  of  water,  contained  in  a  stoppered 
flask ;  4  ozs.  of  cadmium,  in  small  pieces,  are  now  added, 
and  the  flask  closed.  This  mixture  is  left  for  some  days, 
and  very  carefully  shaken  from  time  to  time  ;  the  liquid 
gradually  becomes  discoloured,  from  the  absorption  of  the 
bromine ;  when  this  takes,  place  it  is  filtered  and  evapo- 
rated to  dryness,  as  described  for  iodide  of  cadmium. 

Bromide  of  cadmium  is  of  a  white  colour,  and  less 
soluble  in  water  and  alcohol  than  the  iodide.  These  sub- 
stances, when  prepared  for  sale  on  a  large  scale,  are 
obtained  beautifully  crystallised,  which  may  be  taken  as 
an  evidence  of  their  purity. 


CHAPTER  III. 

PREPARATION    OF    PHOTOGRAPHIC    COLLODION. 

As  the  preparation  of  photographic  collodion  requires  a 
considerable  degree  of  nicety  in  the  operations  of  mea- 
suring and  weighing,  it  will  not  be  out  of  place  here  to 
make  a  few  remarks  relative  thereto  that  may  be  of  some 
utility  to  the  practical  photographer. 

Liquids  are  measured  in  glass  vessels  graduated  into 


PREPARATION    OF    PHOTOGRAPHIC    COLLODION. 


21 


ounces,  drachms,  and  minims,  the  indicating  signs  and 
relative  quantities  of  which  are  shown 
in  the  following  table  : — 

1  pint  contains  20  ounces,  ^  xx. 

5  j,  or  1  ounce,  contains  8  drachms,  5  viij. 

5  j,  or  1  drachm,  contains  60  minims. 

Three  of  these  graduated  glasses 
will  be  found  necessary — one  of  the 
shape  Fig.  19,  to  hold  1  pint,  and  Fig.2o.  Fig.  iy. 
divided  into  ounces;  another  of  the  Divided  Measuring  Glasses, 
same  shape,  to  contain  2  ozs.  and  divided  into  drachms, 
and  a  small  measure,  of  the  form  of  Fig.  20,  holding 
2  drachms  and  graduated  into  minims.  When  used  for 
measuring  liquids,  they  should  be  held  horizontally,  on  a 
level  with  the  eye,  and  the  fluid  poured  in  until  its  surface 
reaches  the  line  corresponding  with  the  required  figure 
on  the  glass.  As  these  graduated  glasses  have  lines  cor- 
responding with  each  other  both  at  the  front  and  back,  the 
proper  position  of  the  measure  as  regards  its  level  is  easily 
shown. 


\Fig.  21.  Table  Balance. 

The  table  balance,  Fig.  21,  will  be  found  the  most  con- 
venient form  for  weighing  quantities  up 
to  2  Ibs.     It  should  have  a  set  of  weights 
from  \  oz.  to  2  Ibs. 

For   weighing    smaller    quantities,    the 
hand  scales,  Fig.  22,  is  required.    The  pans 
should  be  made  of  glass,  and  there  should 
be  a  suitable  set  of  weights,  from  \  grain 
to  2  drachms.      Glass  is  the  best  material 
for  the  scale-pans;  but  if  formed  of  metal, 
it  will  be  requisite,  before  proceeding  to 
weigh  any  chemical,  to  place    a  piece  of     Fifft  22.  Hand 
paper  of  equal  dimensions  in  each  pan,  by          Scales, 
which  arrangement  the  whole  of  the  substance  is  con- 


22  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

veniently  removed  after  weighing,  and  any  injurious  action 
avoided.  When  fluids  are  required  to  be  weighed,  a 
glass  or  other  vessel  to  hold  the  liquid,  is  first  accurately 
balanced  or  counterpoised,  and  then  the  weighing  done 
in  the  ordinary  manner. 

The  preparation  of  Iodised  Collodion  requires  the 
following  substances  : — 

Ether,  sp.  gr. -720  3  ounces. 

Alcohol,  sp.  gr.  -805    li     ,, 

Gun-cotton 16  grains. 

Iodide  of  Cadmium  in  powder 18      ,, 

Bromide  of  Cadmium        ,,       6      ,, 

The  gun-cotton  is  first  put  into  a  suitable  glass  bottle, 
afterwards  the  iodide  and  bromide  of  cadmium  and  the 
alcohol.  The  mixture  is  then  strongly  agitated  to  dis- 
solve the  salts  of  cadmium,  and  to  open  the  fibres  of 
the  cotton,  and  facilitate  its  subsequent  solution.  The 
ether  is  now  added,  and  the  whole  again  well  shaken 
until  the  cotton  is  dissolved,  when  the  bottle  is  closed 
with  a  good  cork,  and  left  to  settle  for  twenty -four  hours, 
after  which  the  clear  and  limpid  portion  is  decanted  into 
small  glass  bottles  for  use. 

From  the  circumstance  that  collodion  containing  the 
iodiser  as  above  is  liable  to  decompose,  it  will  generally 
be  found  preferable  to  prepare  the  collodion  and  iodising 
solution  separately  in  the  following  manner. 

Plain  thick  Collodion,  without  iodides  or  bromides,  is 
first  prepared  as  follows  : — 

Into  a  bottle  of  about  one  quart  capacity  is  placed — 

No.  1. 

Gun-cotton 450  grains. 

Alcohol 7  ounces, 

Ether 25      „ 

These  materials  are  very  strongly  agitated  together, 
and  left  to  settle  for  some  days. 

A  solution  of  iodide  and  bromide  is  also  prepared 
thus : — 

No.  2. 

Alcohol  -     3f  ounces. 

Iodide  of  Cadmium 154  grains. 

Bromide  of  Cadmium 54  grains. 


PREPARATION    OF    PHOTOGRAPHIC    COLLODION.  23 

The  iodide  and  bromide  of  cadmium  should  be  ground 
very  fine  in  a  porcelain  or  glass  mortar  with  a  small 
quantity  of  the  alcohol,  then  the  remainder  added,  and 
when  the  salts  are  dissolved,  the  whole  carefully  filtered. 
The  clear  solution  must  be  preserved  in  a  well-stopped 
bottle. 

To  prepare  Sensitised  Collodion,  pour  into  a  four- 
ounce  bottle — • 

Thick  Collodion  (No.  1.) 1  ounce. 

Solution  of  Iodide  and  Bromide  (No.  2.)    ...  3  drachms. 

Alcohol   6  drachms. 

Ether  If  ounce. 

Immediately  after  the  bottle  has  been  well  shaken,  so 
as  properly  to  mix  the  ingredients,  the  sensitised  or 
iodised  collodion  is  ready  for  use,  but  is  improved  by  being 
kept  a  few  hours  after  sensitising  before  being  applied. 

Both  the  plain  collodion  and  the  alcoholic  solution  of 
iodide  and  bromide  of  cadmium  can  be  preserved  for  any 
length  of  time  without  deterioration,  provided  they  are 
kept  separate  and  in  well-closed  bottles ;  and  the  sensi- 
tised collodion  can,  therefore,  be  prepared  when  required 
with  great  facility. 

The  formula  for  sensitised  collodion  just  given  will  be 
found  to  work  best  at  a  mean  temperature  of  60°  Fahr. 
When  the  weather  is  very  hot  a  little  more  alcohol  must 
be  added,  and  the  quantity  of  ether  slightly  diminished ; 
and,  on  the  contrary,  when  the  atmosphere  is  very  cold 
the  alcohol  may  be  diminished,  and  the  ether  increased. 

When  a  glass  plate  is  coated  with  collodion,  a  larger 
quantity  is  poured  over  its  surface  than  is  really  required, 
the  surplus  being  received  in  a  bottle  ;  it  will  therefore 
be  easily  understood  that  after  a  considerable  number  of 
plates  have, been  coated,  the  proper  relative  proportions 
of  the  constituents  of  the  collodion  will  have  been  dis- 
turbed by  evaporation,  and  that  both  ether  and  alcohol 
must  be  added  to  bring  it  to  its  normal  condition.  It 
must  be  borne  in  mind  in  making  the  required  addition  of 
ether  and  alcohol,  that  ether  being  much  more  volatile 
than  alcohol,  a  larger  relative  proportion  will  have  evapo- 
rated, and  consequently  a  larger  quantity  of  ether  mast 
be  used  than  of  alcohol. 


24:  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

If  the  layer  of  collodion  on  the  glass  appears  too  thin, 
a  little  of  the  thick  collodion,  No.  1,  must  be  added ;  if, 
on  the  contrary,  it  be  too  thick,  and  in  consequence  does 
not  spread  evenly  over  the  glass,  it  can  be  diluted  with 
a  small  quantity  of  a  mixture  of  two  parts  of  ether  and 
one  of  alcohol. 

If  the  collodion  film  detaches  itself  from  the  glass  plate 
after  being  sensitised  in  the  silver  bath,  it  indicates  that  a 
larger  proportion  of  ether  is  required,  or  that  the  gun- 
cotton  employed  is  not  suitable,  in  which  case  recourse 
may  be  had  to  a  gun-cotton  prepared  according  to  the 
formula  given  in  Note  3,  which  produces  a  very  adhesive 
collodion,  especially  applicable  when  glasses  of  large 
dimensions  are  employed. 

If  too  much  alcohol  be  added  to  the  collodion,  the  film 
is  liable  to  become  detached,  and  the  coating  itself  has  a 
wavy  uneven  appearance.  If  there  be  too  much  ether 
the  layer  is  very  adhesive,  but  it  is  difficult  to  get  the 
collodion  to  spread  itself  evenly  over  the  plate,  especially 
if  it  be  of  any  large  size. 

Collodion  ought  to  be  preserved  in  well-stopped  bottles, 
but  it  is  indifferent  whether  bottles  with  glass  stoppers 
or  furnished  with  good  corks  be  employed ;  they  ought, 
however,  as  much  as  possible,  to  be  kept  quite  full,  and 
in  the  dark. 

Iodised  collodion  is  never  good  the  first  day  of  its  pre- 
paration ;  it  must  be  kept  for  at  least  two  days  to  acquire 
all  its  properties ;  neither  must  it  be  kept  too  long,  for 
impressions  are  then  taken  with  it  less  rapidly. 

Collodion  is  very  unstable;  sometimes  without  any 
apparent  reason  it  becomes  slow  in  producing  im- 
pressions ;  at  other  times  it  changes  to  a  red  colour  at 
the  end'  of  a  few  days.  In  this  latter  case  recourse  ought 
to  be  had  to  a  new  preparation,  and  care  taken  to  ascer- 
tain if  the  materials  previously  employed  were  sufficiently 
pure.  The  colour  of  good  collodion  is  commonly  of  a 
very  light  lemon  colour,  although  sometimes  completely 
colourless. 

A  very  clear  and  perfectly  settled  collodion  must 
always  be  made  use  of.  The  following  is  an  excellent 
little  apparatus  for  pouring  out  collodion  free  from 
sediment. 


CLEANING    GLASS    PLATES,    ETC.  25 

A  very  tall  and  narrow  bottle  must  be  procured  of  the 
form  indicated  by  Fig.  23.  The  cork  a  is  pierced  with 
two  holes  made  with  a  round  file ; 
two  small  glass  tubes  are  fitted  to  it, 
of  which  A  goes  a  little  way  through 
the  cork,  and  the  other  is  bent  down 
in  the  form  of  H>  only  one  branch  is 
shorter  than  the  other.  The  longer 
branch  is  dipped  into  the  collodion  at 
a  short  distance  from  the  bottom. 
After  a  certain  quantity  of  collodion 
has  been  used  for  several  hours,  what 
remains  should  be  poured  into  the 
bottle  by  lifting  the  cork  a,  which 
must  be  again  replaced.  The  next 
morning  the  collodion  will  be  per- 
fectly settled,  and  by  blowing  into 
the  tube  A,  the  clear  liquid  passes  by  the  tube  D  a  B, 
from  the  extremity  of  which  it  is  received  into  a  proper 
bottle. 

Care  must  be  taken  that  the  surface  of  the  collodion  be 
lower  than  the  extremity  of  the  tube  B  ;  should  it  be 
otherwise  the  tube  must  be  raised  by  causing  it  to  pass 
through  the  cork,  or  else  the  collodion  would  continue 
to  flow  after  the  required  quantity  had  been  decanted. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

CLEANING    GLASS    PLATES,    ETC. 

GLASS  plates  for  photographic  purposes  are  employed 
with  ground  edges — that  is  to  say,  the  glasses,  after 
being  cut  with  a  diamond,  are  ground  on  their  edges  by 
means  of  a  fine  file,  aided  by  oil  of  turpentine.  The 
object  of  this  operation  is  to  prevent  the  operator  from 
cutting  himself  upon  the  sharp  edges  of  the  glass. 

In  place  of   crystal    sheet,  ordinary  patent   plate,   or 
even  flatted  crown   glasses  may  be  used,  especially  for 


Zb  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

the  smaller-sized  (under  half- plate).  Patent  plate  being 
more  perfectly  polished  than  flatted  crown,  is  also  more 
easily  cleaned,  and  therefore  preferable. 

Whatever  be  the  kind  of  glass  employed,  the  following 
is  the  method  which  should  be  pursued  in  cleaning  the 
plates  whether  they  have  been  used  before  or  not : — 

A  mixture  of  equal  quantities  of  nitric  acid  and  water 
is  made,  and  the  glasses  covered  therewith  on  both  sides 
by  the  aid  of  some  cotton-wool  fastened  to  the  end  of  a 
stick ;  and  as  each  plate  is  successively  treated  in  this 
manner,  they  are  placed  against  the  wall  to  drain. 

Instead  of  nitric  acid  a  solution  of  carbonate  of  potash, 
of  the  strength  of  one  pound  to  one  quart  of  water,  may 
be  advantageously  employed.  The  liquid  acts  energe- 
tically upon  plates  that  have  been  previously  used,  and 
is  free  from  the  objection  to  which  nitric  acid  is  open, 
namely,  that  of  staining  the  hands  yellow. 

It  is  always  a  good  plan  to  clean  a  number  of  plates  at 
the  same  time — as  many  as  twenty,  for  instance — because  it 
is  necessary  to  allow  the  alkaline  or  acid  solution  to  act  for 
at  least  an  hour.  The  plates  are  then  submitted  to  the 
action  of  a  strong  current  of  water,  and  rubbed  at  the  same 
time  on  both  sides  with  a  sponge,  in  order  to  remove  all 
impurities.  It  is  almost  unnecessary  to  add  that  they  are 
finished  by  allowing  the  water  to  flow  in  all  directions, 
copiously,  on  the  inclined  plate,  to  carry  off  every  trace  of 
dust.  The  glasses  are  then  placed  in  a  grooved  frame,  similar 


Fig.  24.  Support  for  Cleaned  Plates. 


to  Fig.  24,  which  precludes  the  necessity  of  description, 
where  they  are  allowed  to  drain  and  dry.     The  photo- 


CLEANING  GLASS  PLATES,  ETC. 


27: 


grapber  should  furnisli  himself  with  several  of  these 
JraiDing  frames  of  different  sizes,  for  they  will  be  found 
very  convenient. 

The  glass  having  been  cleaned,  is  not  yet  sufficiently 
pure  to  receive  the  collodion :  it  is  further  necessary  to 
resort  to  a  more  complete  polishing.  For  this  purpose  an 
oak  plate -holder,  of  the  form  A  B,  Fig.  25,  and  of 
suitable  size  should  be  used.  At  the  end  B  is  placed  a 
piece  of  wood  about  the  thickness  of  a  crown -piece.  A 


Fig.  27.  Fig.  26.  Fig.  25. 

Tripoli  Bottle  and  Plate-holder. 

groove,  c  d,  admits  of  a  second  piece,  e,  fixed  underneath 
by  a  clamp-screw,  Fig.  27,  to  fix  the  plate  a  b,  of  any 
size  within  the  dimensions  of  the  plate-holder. 

In  addition  to  this,  there  should  be  near  at  hand  a  box 
containing  powdered  tripoli,  and  a  bottle  furnished  with 
a  tube  of  small  bore,  Fig.  27,  containing  alcohol.  The 
glass  being  fixed  on  the  plate -holder,  Fig.  27,  is  well 
dusted  with  tripoli,  a  few  drops  of  alcohol  are  poured 
upon  it,  and  then,  by  means  of  a  little  cotton -wool,  or 
papier  Joseph,  the  mixture  is  rubbed  all  over,  carefully 
avoiding  contact  between  the  fingers  and  the  glass. 
The  rubbing  is  repeated,  but  without  pressing  too  hard, 
until  the  alcohol  has  entirely  evaporated,  and  the  plate  is 
dry.  The  excess  of  adherent  tripoli  being  removed  by  a 
c  2 


28  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

dry  linen  cloth  set  apart  for  this  especial  purpose,  the 
final  polish  is  given  with  an  exceedingly  dry  buckskin  or 
chamois  leather,  which  should  also  be  used  exclusively  for 
this  operation. 

The  plate  is  then  removed  from  the  plate -holder,  its 
edges  and  back  wiped,  and  placed  in  a  grooved  plate  - 
box.  Care  should  be  taken  that  that  side  of  the  glass 
which  has  been  polished  for  the  reception  of  the  collodion 
film,  should  in  each  case  face  the  same  way,  in  order  to 
avoid  errors  in  pouring  on  the  collodion. 

The  plates  should  never  be  cleaned  more  than  twelve 
hours  before  using,  especially  if  the  box  in  which  they 
are  contained  is  likely  to  be  carried  about,  as  in  that  case 
they  would  again  become  covered  with  minute  particles 
of  dust 


CHAPTER  V. 

ON  THE  DARK  ROOM,  AND  PHOTOGRAPHIC  LABORATORY. 

IN  the  practice  of  photography,  three  different  rooms  are 
necessary  :  one  well  lighted,  in  which  the  sitter  is  placed  ; 
another  of  commodious  dimensions,  which  serves  the 
purpose  of  a  laboratory ;  and  a  third  made  quite  dark,  in 
which  are  performed  all  those  operations  which  may  not 
see  the  light  of  day. 

The  laboratory  should  be  of  such  dimensions  as  are 
adapted  to  meet  the  wants  of  the  photographer.  Amateurs 
generally  take  plenty  of  room,  because  in  most  cases  it 
costs  them  nothing ;  but  professional  photographers  are 
oftener  obliged  to  content  themselves  with  a  small  apart- 
ment, which  frequently  serves  the  double  purpose  of  dark 
room  and  laboratory. 

However  this  may  be,  it  is  best  to  have  a  large  room, 
where  preparations  can  be  made,  positive  proofs  printed, 
&c.,  on  the  ground  floor,  well  furnished  with  drawers 
and  tables. 

The  dark  chamber  ought  to  be,  on  the  contrary,  very 


DARK  ROOM,  AND  PHOTOGRAPHIC  LABORATORY.   29 

simple.  Two  or  three  tables  are  sufficient,  and  the  light 
ohould  either  be  entirely  excluded  by  pasting  black  paper 
over  the  windows,  and  the  operations  conducted  by  the 
light  of  a  candle  or  a  gas  jet,  surrounded  by  a  square 
lantern  of  yellow  glass,  or  else,  as  often  preferred,  the  dark 
room  is  so  arranged  that  the  light  comes  exclusively 
through  a  frame  of  yellow  glass  about  10  inches  by  8  inches, 
and  this  covered  with  a  sheet  of  very  thin  white  paper,  in 
order  to  impede  the  passage  of  the  direct  solar  rays.  A 
hinged  frame  is  fitted  in  front  of  this  square  of  yellow 
glass  in  such  a  way  as  to  admit  of  its  being  totally  or 
partially  covered,  in  order  to  diminish  or  increase  the 
amount  of  illumination  at  pleasure. 


Fig.  28.  Dark  Chamber. 

It  is  necessary  to  select  glass  of  a  deep  yellow  colour, 
and  avoid  the  paler  kinds. 

The  drawing  (Fig.  28)  represents  the  dark  chamber 
which  has  been  used  for  many  years  by  M.  Monkhoven. 

The  entrance  is  at  the  bottom  of  the  room,  and  the 
door,  for  greater  security,  covered  with  a  black  drapery. 
A  cistern  of  water,  furnished  with  a  tap,  supplies  the 
necessary  means  for  washing,  and  underneath  this  is 


30  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

placed  the  sink,  with  a  pipe  to  convey  the  waste  water 
outside.  On  one  side  should  be  placed  the  dishes  used 
for  nitrate  of  silver  bath,  and  for  sensitising  albumenised 
paper,  and  on  the  other  those  which  appertain  to  fixing, 
and  other  operations  incompatible  with  the  nitrate  of 
silver  solution.  Shelves  should  also  be  fitted  up  to 
support  funnels  while  filtering,  bottles,  &c. 

A  second  reference  to  Fig.  28  will  show  the  arrange- 
ment by  which  the  amount  of  light  is  regulated;  it  will 
be  seen,  in  fact,  that  by  lowering  the  yellow  frame,  which 
is  shown  in  that  position  in  the  drawing,  the  room 
becomes  inundated  with  light.  This  frame  need  be 
closed  only  when  the  plate  is  immersed  in  the  nitrate 
of  silver  bath,  and  during  the  development  of  the  image. 
When  the  required  intensity  has  been  attained  in  the 
last  operation,  the  plate  is  washed  and  the  frame  lowered 
in  order  to  see  more  clearly.  If  the  sun  shines  on  this 
window,  it  is  absolutely  necessary  to  paste  over  it  some 
thin  paper  to  stop  the  too  direct  rays. 


CHAPTER  VI. 

COATING  WITH  COLLODION  AND  SENSITISING  THE  PLATE. 

THE  nitrate  of  silver  bath  is  prepared  by  dissolving — 
Pure  Nitrate  of  Silver  2  ounces. 

IN 

Distilled  or  Bain  Water 24  ounces. 

This  liquid  is  filtered  and  poured  into  a  gutta-percha 
tray.  The  collodion,  spread  upon  the  glass,  is  plunged  into 
the  nitrate  of  silver  bath ;  the  film  whitens  by  the  trans- 
formation of  the  iodide  of  cadmium  into  iodide  of  silver, 
which  is  sensitive  to  light,  and  it  is  in  this  state  that  it 
should  be  exposed  in  the  camera. 

Such  is  a  general  statement  of  the  process  to  be  now 
described  somewhat  in  detail. 


COATING    AND    SENSITISING    THE    PLATE. 


31 


The  collodion  ought  to  be  contained  in  a  bottle  with 
a  wide  month  (Fig.  29),  which  month  should  always 
be  carefully  cleaned  before  pouring  the  col- 
lodion on  the  glass. 

The  box  containing  the  cleaned  glasses 
being  placed  in  the  dark  chamber,  a  plate  is 
withdrawn,  and  the  dust  removed  from  the 
polished  side  by  means  of  a  large  badger-hair 
brush ;  then  holding  the  plate  by  one  corner 
(Fig.  30),  in  the  right  hand,  the  collodion  is 
poured  upon  it  from  the  left  hand,  com- 
mencing at  the  corner  B.  It  is  then  allowed 
to  flow  by  inclining  the  plate  from  left  to  right, 
and  finally  draining  back  into  a  separate 
bottle  from  the  corner  D,  Fig.  31.  If,  at  this  moment, 
the  plate  be  examined  in  a  particular  light,  it  will  be  seen 
that  it  is  covered  with  an  infinity  of  small  ridges  in  the 


Fig.  29 


Fig.  30.  Coating  tiie  Plate. 

direction  B  D  (Fig.  30) ;  but  on  inclining  the  plate 
rapidly  from  left  to  right,  these  ridges  will  disappear. 
As  soon  as  this  happens,  the  plate  is  ready  to  be  immersed 
in  the  nitrate  of  silver  bath ;  but  it  is  always  advisable 
to  wait  a  few  seconds  (and  how  many,  experience  alone 
can  indicate  precisely),  so  that  the  film  may  be  suffi- 
ciently "  set."  There  are  certain  characteristics  by  which 
it  may  be  determined  if  the  right  moment  has  arrived  for 
sensitising  the  plate  ;  these  are  : — 

1.  If  the  plate  is  immersed  in   the    bath    before  the 


32 


PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 


collodion  has  been  allowed  time  to  "  set,"  the  film  will 
become  detached  in  fragments ;  and,  in  this  case,  it  will 
be  necessary  to  filter  the  bath. 

2.  If    the    immersion    take 
place  at  the  right  time,  the  film 
whitens  gradually. 

3.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  the 
film  be  allowed  to  become   too 
dry      before       immersion,      it 
whitens  instantly,  and  a  good 
proof  is  never  obtainable  under 
these  circumstances. 

Up  to  a  certain  point  it  is 
not  difficult  to  determine  when 
the  plate  should  be  immersed 
in  the  nitrate  of  silver  bath.  It 
will  be  found  if  the  plate  is 
looked  at  in  a  certain  light,  that 
it  has  assumed  a  dull,  un- 
polished appearance.  This, 
which  is  the  right  moment 
for  immersion,  will  be  arrived 
at  in  summer  probably  in  about 
twenty  seconds,  while  in  winter  it  will  probably  take 
sixty  seconds. 

Nitrate  of  silver  bath  is  very  easy  to 
prepare.  It  is  quite  as  well  for  those 
whose  operations  are  conducted  on  a 
somewhat  extensive  scale  to  have  a 
considerable  quantity  of  bath  solution, 
and  keep  it  in  a  large  bottle  to  which  is 
adapted  a  funnel  and  filter,  Fig.  32. 
The  same  filter  will  last  a  long  time ; 
and,  on  leaving  work,  the  nitrate  of 
silver  bath  whicli  has  been  used  during 
the  day  is  poured  into  the  filter,  and  in 
this  way  a  solution  in  proper  condition 
is  always  maintained  at  hand. 

.  32.   Apparatus  for       For  the  nitrate  of  silver  bath,  dishes 
fi%1i™rNBlrth.e  °'      in  gutta-percha,  porcelain,  or  wood  with 
glass  bottoms,  are  used,  Figs.  33,  34,  37. 
Gutta-percha  dishes  are,    perhaps,  most  frequently  em- 


Fig.  31.  Receiving  the  Collodion 
into  a  separate  Bottle. 


COATING    AND    SENSITISING    THE    PLATE. 


33 


Figs.  33  and  34.  Dishes  in 

Porcelain  and  Wood  with  Glass 

Bottom. 


ployed,*  but  as  vertical  baths  in  glass  and  gutta-percha 
are  also  used,  we  shall  say  a  few 
words  in  reference  to  them. 

The  reason  why  we  recom- 
mend a  gutta-percha  dish  in 
preference  to  one  in  porcelain 
is,  that  the  film  itself  can  be 
better  seen,  as  also  the  impuri- 
ties which  float  in  the  solution. 

There  are  several  methods  of 
immersing  the  plates  in  the 
nitrate  of  silver  bath ;  and  as 
this  is  one  of  the  most  impor- 
tant points  in  the  present  chapter,  we  will  pause  to  con- 
sider it  somewhat  in  detail. 

The  dish  containing  the  nitrate  of  silver  bath  being 
much  larger  than  the  plate, 
is  raised  at  one  end,  Fig.  38, 
in  order  that  the  solution 
shall  accumulate  at  the  op- 
posite end ;  the  plate,  pre- 
viously coated  with  collo- 
dion, is  placed  against  the  other  edge,  and  held  there  by 
means  of  the  finger  or  a  silver  wire  hook;  lowering  then 
the  plate  by  a  continuous  motion,  and  allowing  the  dish  at 
the  same  time  to  assume  the 
horizontal  position,  the  liquid 
flows  at  once,  and  without 
stopping,  over  the  whole  of  the 
plate  :  after  this  the  dish 
should  be  raised  and  lowered 
during  a  minute  or  so.  Then 
introducing  underneath  the 
plate  a  hook  made  of  flat- 
tened silver  wire,  Fig.  35,  and 
by  its  means  withdrawing  the 
plate  from  the  bath,  it  will  be 
seen  to  be  covered  by  a  num- 
ber of  veins  which  show  that  the  nitrate  of  silver  bath 


Fig.  37.  Gutta-percha  Di.h. 


Figs.  35,  36,  39, 


*  This  remark  is  correct  only  as  far  as  regards  the  practice  of  conti- 
nental photographers, — in  England  glass  and  porcelain  baths  are  always 
employed. 

c  3 


PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 


has  not  thoroughly  penetrated  the  film,  and  that,  there- 
fore, the  plate  should  be  raised  and  lowered  alternately 
until  the  silver  solution  flows  evenly  and  smoothly  over 
the  whole  surface  of  the  film. 


It  is  at  this  point  that  the  plate  should  be  withdrawn, 
the  fingers  being  covered  with  India-rubber  finger-stalls, 

in  the  absence  of  which 
box -wood  forceps,  or  an 
American  clip,  should 
be  used,  as  the  nitrate 
of  silver  blackens  the 
hands  very  strongly 
(Note  5).  The  plate 
is  allowed  to  drain  from 
the  excess  of  adherent 
nitrate  of  silver  solution, 
and  is  then  placed  in 
the  camera  frame. 

This  method  of  ope- 
rating requires  only  a 
small  quantity  of  nitrate 
of  silver  bath  solution, 
which  is  accordingly 
exhausted  in  a  propor- 
The  plan  we  are  about  to  describe 


Figs.  40,  41.  Vertical  Glass  Bath. 


tionately  shorter  time. 

requires,  on  the  contrary,  a  large  bulk  of  solution,  which 


COATING    AND    SENSITISING    THE    PLATE. 


has  the  advantage  of  becoming  very  slowly  exhausted. 
Moreover,  a  vessel  may  be  used  which  is  only  just  large 
enough  to  allow  the  plate  to  be  immersed  and  withdrawn 
with  freedom. 

The  solution  is  contained  in  a  vertical  bath,  either  of 
glass  or  gutta-percha,  Fig.  40 ;  and  by  means  of  a  hook 
or  dipper  of  gutta-percha,  which  is  introduced  on  the 
lower  side  of  the  vessel,  the  plate  is  immersed  by  one 
continuous  motion  into  the  fluid,  raising  and  lowering 
it  alternately  as  before.  The  plate  is  finally  withdrawn 
ready  for  exposure,  when  the  ridges  or  lines  thereon  have 
disappeared.  In  Note  6  are  given  details  for  the  prepa- 
ration of  nitrate  of  silver  bath. 

Another  plan  we  can  much  recommend  is  as  fol- 
lows : — Two  silver  hooks  are  first  procured,  made  oi 
flat  sheet  silver,  and  bifurcate,  of  the  shape  shown  in 
Fig.  37.  The  nitrate  of  silver  bath  being  contained  in  a 
dish  (Fig.  42)  of  gutta-percha,  the  plate  is  held  between 
the  two  hooks,  the  film 
being  uppermost,  and 
plunged  at  one  stroke 
beneath  the  liquid,  tak- 
ing care  at  the  same 
time  that  one  end  is 
immersed  before  the 
other,  for  unless  this  be 
done  the  liquid  will  spirt 
out  of  the  dish.  The 
plate  being  once  fairly 
covered  by  the  solution, 
one  of  the  hooks  is  re- 
moved ;  and  with  the 
other  the  plate  is  raised 
and  lowered,  in  order  to 
get  rid  of- the  veins  or  greasiness  of  which  we  have  spoken 
above. 

Instead  of  two  hooks,  it  may  be  found  more  advan- 
tageous to  use  the  two  combined  in  one,  as  shown  in 
Fig.  42.  We  may  observe,  in  passing,  that  the  silver 
hooks  may  be  replaced  by  others  made  of  whalebone. 
In  order  to  make  these,  it  is  necessary  to  hold  them  in 
the  flame  of  a  spirit-lamp  until  they  bend,  and  to  allow 


36  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

them  to  cool,  maintaining  pressure  in  the  proper  curve 
by  means  of  the  fingers  until  quite  cold. 

Whichever  method  is  followed  in  immersing  the  plate 
in  the  nitrate  of  silver  bath,  it  is  indispensably  necessary 
that  it  be  the  result  of  one  steady  and  continuous  motion; 
for  if  this  be  not  the  case,  lines  will  be  formed  upon  the 
film,  which  will  become  apparent  very  soon  in  irreparable 
stains. 

To  preserve  the  hands  from  the  action  of  nitrate  of 
silver,  some  amateurs  use  India-rubber  finger-stalls,  or 
gloves  of  the  same  material ;  but  such  apparatus  will  be 
found  very  inconvenient,  and  those  who  intend  to  be  suc- 
cessful in  photography  should  make  up  their  minds  before 
going  into  it,  to  sacrifice  the  delicacy  of  their  hands  and 
the  whiteness  of  their  shirt-cuffs. 

We  presume  it  is  hardly  necessary  to  observe  that,  at 
the  time  of  sensitising  the  plate,  the  room  should  be  made 
quite  dark — an  operation  easily  accomplished  by  moving 
the  shutter  in  front  of  the  yellow  glass  until  the  light  is 
almost  entirely  excluded.  With  a  little  practice  this  will 
be  found  comparatively  easy. 

As  soon  as  the  plate  is  placed  in  the  camera-back,  the 
window  and  door  may  be  opened,  and  the  bath  covered 
with  a  plate  of  glass,  in  order  to  preserve  it  from  dust. 


CHAPTER  VII. 

PHOTOGRAPHIC    CAMERAS,    LENSES,    ETC. 

THE  common  camera-obscura  is  supposed  to  have  been 
discovered  by  Baptiste  Porta,  about  the  year  1590.  It 
may  be  simply  described  as  a  box,  at  one  end  of  which 
is  fixed  a  piece  of  ground  glass,  and  at  the  other  a  convex 
or  magnifying -glass,  mounted  in  a  sliding  tube  to  regulate 
the  focus. 

All  convex  or  concave  glasses  are  called  lenses;  the 
focus  of  a  convex  glass  or  lens  is  the  distance  between 


PHOTOGRAPHIC    CAMERAS,    LENSES,    ETC.  37 

the  glass  when  exposed  to  the  sun,  and  the  point  or  spot 
of  light  where  the  rays  unite  (Fig.  43).  (See  Note  6.) 

If  the  distance   between  the  A 

magnifying  lens  and  the  ground 
glass  of  an  ordinary  camera,  be 
regulated  to  the  focus  as  de- 
scribed, and  the  lens  directed 
towards  some  distant  objects,  it 
will  be  seen,  on  so  shading  the 
ground  glass  with  a  black  cloth  Ftg' 43> 

placed  over  the  head  as  to  prevent  any  lateral  rays  of 
light  falling  on  it,  that  the  image  of  those  distant  objects 
are  clearly  represented  reversed  on  the  ground  glass.  If 
the  camera  be  now  directed  to  some  near  objects  they 
will  not  appear  distinct,  and  the  lens  will  require  to  be 
drawn  out  further  from  the  ground  glass  before  they  are 
shown  with  perfect  sharpness.  This  adjustment  of  the 
lens  is  called  focussing  the  image. 

It  will  be  found  impossible,  however,  to  focus  the 
whole  of  the  objects  perfectly ;  there  will  always  be  cer- 
tain parts  of  the  picture  which  want  distinctness.  But  if 
a  piece  of  cardboard,  having  a  small  hole  in  it,  be  placed 
&  short  distance  in  front  of  the  lens,  the  image  on  the 
shaded  ground  glass  will  become  much  more  distinct 
and  sharp,  or,  in  other  words,  the  picture  can  be  better 
focussecl.  Any  similar  arrangement  to  that  described  is 
called  a  stop  or  diaphragm. 

The  foregoing  remarks  will  explain  the  principles  and 
construction  of  the  photographic  camera,  which  essentially 


Fig.  44.    Ordinary  form  of  Photographic  Camera. 

consists  of  two  parts — the  lens  or  objective,  and  the  box 
or  camera.     However,  it  will  be  easily  understood  that 


38 


PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 


these  two  apparatuses,  to  be  rendered  suitable  for  the 
various  purposes  of  photography,  must  of  necessity  re- 
quire more  special  and  compli- 
cated construction  than  has  been 
described. 

The  ordinary  form  of  a  photo- 
graphic camera,  Fig.  44,  consists 
of  a  box,  B,  in  which  slides 
another  box,  A,  holding  the  frame 
C  with  the  ground  glass.  For 
•  the  purpose  of  fixing  the  sliding 
part  A,  a  board,  D,  is  fastened  to 
the  box  B  in  which  is  a  groove, 
as  shown  in  the  drawing.  On 
the  lower  side  of  the  box  A  is 
fixed  a  plate  with  a  thumb-screw 
passing  into  the  groove.  Thus, 
within  certain  limits,  the  two 
boxes  A  and  B  can  be  adjusted  to 
various  lengths,  and  fixed  at  the 
required  focus  by  the  aid  of  the 
thumb-screw.  The  lens  is  placed 
in  front  of  B. 

This  form  of  camera  has  gene- 
rally a  single  sliding-box,  A ;  but 
sometimes,  however,  for  the  sake 
of  portability,  they  are  constructed 
with  several  slides.  The  mate- 
rial of  which  these  cameras  are 
made  is  usually  mahogany  or 
walnut  wood. 

The  tripod,  or  camera  stand, 
for  supporting  the  camera,  is 
usually  of  two  kinds  —  one  for 
travelling,  the  other  for  use  in 
the  operating  room  for  portraits, 
&c. 

The  travelling  stand,   Fig.  45. 

consists   of   a   strong   wooden   or 
I*.  45.  Tripod  Stand.       ^j    ^^     ^    ^.^    ^ 

made  to  slip  three  feet,  which  for  greater  strength  and 
firmness  are  made  double.    These  feet  for  convenience  in 


PHOTOGRAPHIC    CAMERAS,    LENSES,    ETC. 

travelling,  can  easily  be  doubled  up,  and  removed  from 
the  triangle  by  unscrewing  the  joints. 

There  are  many  different  models  of  tripod  stands  for 
travelling,  but  they  are  all  more  or  less  on  the  principle 
of  the  one  just  described,  and  are  made  lighter  or  stronger 
as  may  be  required  for  the  size  of  camera.  A  black 


Fig.  46.  Stand  for  Operating  Room,  and  Camera  for  "  Cartes  de  Visite." 

cloth,  so  constructed  as  to  cover  over  the  extended  tripod 
stand,  forms  a  convenient  dark  chamber  for  changing 
sensitised  glasses  from  or  to  the  camera  back  when  dry 
collodion  plates  are  employed. 

The  stand  used  in  the  operating  room  or  studio,  not 


PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

requiring  to  be  moved  any  distance  from  place  to  place, 
may  be  of  a  much  stouter  and  heavier  construction  than 
the  ordinary  tripod  stand.  The  form  of  camera  stand  repre- 
sented Fig.  4(5,  combines  solidity  with  facility  of  adjust- 
ment. The  upper  board  supports  the  camera,  and  in  order 
to  allow  of  a  tilting  motion  is  connected  with  two  half 
circles  of  wood,  which  can  be  fixed  in  position  by  a  thumb- 
screw to  an  upright  sliding  frame,  moving  in  a  socket  of  the 
firm  tripod  stand.  This  sliding  frame  serves  to  adjust  the 
height  of  the  camera.  Sometimes  this  form  of  stand  has 
a  winch,  with  rack  or  chain,  to  facilitate  the  raising  and 
lowering  of  the  camera.  This  addition  is  very  convenient, 
especially  when  a  heavy  camera  is  employed. 

A  convenient  form  of  camera  for  travelling,  and  suit- 
able for  plates  12  inches  by  10  inches,  and  larger  sizes,  is 
represented  at  Fig.  47.  B  is  a  fixed  box,  pierced  in  front 
with  a  round  hole,  to  which  is  attached  the  lens.  Under- 
neath, and  on  the  side  (c)  are  two  pieces  of  brass,  in  each 
of  which  can  be  fixed  a  thumb-screw,  as  seen  at  a.  The 
sliding  body  A  has  also  two  similar  pieces,  one  at  d,  the 
other  underneath,  each  having  a  thumb-screw.  The  top 
of  the  tripod  (which  is  seen  in  the  figure)  has  a  hollow, 
in  which  a  long  piece  of  wood  b  can  be  fixed ;  this  has  a 
groove  in  the  middle,  to  admit  the  two  thumb -screws. 


Fig.  47.  Camera  without  a  Tail-piece. 


By  this  arrangement,  on  turning  the  screw  a,  a  very 
great  degree  of  firmness  is  given  to  the  part  B  of  the 
camera ;  also  to  the  tail-board  6,  and  the  top  of  the 
tripod.  The  sliding  body  A  can  be  drawn  out  or  in, 
and  fixed  as  the  operator  wishes.  The  instrument  can 
also  be  used  on  its  side  (the  two  pieces  of  brass  which 


PHOTOGRAPHIC    CAMERAS,    LENSES,    ETC. 


41 


are  seen  at  c  and  d  serve  for  this  purpose),  enabling  up- 
right views  to  be  taken  with  the  same  facility  as  long  ones. 

This  form  of  camera  is  more  convenient  than  the  ordi- 
nary form,  Fig.  44,  especially  for  taking  large  views  ; 
besides  which,  the  immoveable  tail-board  of  the  model, 
Fig.  44,  prevents  its  being  conveniently  used  on  the  side 
for  upright  pictures. 

Another  form  of  camera,  suitable  both  for  the  operating 
room  and  for  travelling,  is  represented,  Fig.  48.  It  will 


A. 


Fig.  48.  Bellows-body  Camera. 

be  found  extremely  light  and  portable.  The  construc- 
tion of  this  form  of  camera  will  be  easily  understood  from 
the  cut.  M  is  a  square  bellows  body,  connected  with  the 
wooden  frames  A,  a.  The  frame  A,  holding  the  lens,  is 
firmly  fixed  to  a  board  n,  n,  which  can  be  lengthened  or 
shortened  at  will.  The  frame  a  holds  the  ground-glass 
frame  and  dark  slides. 

Whatever  may  be  the  form  of  camera  employed,  the 
general  principles  to  be  observed  in  its  use  are  the 
same.  For  the  purpose  of  illustration,  suppose  a  camera 
mounted ,  on  its  stand,  as  shown  in  Fig.  55,  p.  49,  and 
directed  towards  a  person  who  stands  for  a  model.  On 
drawing  out  the  sliding  body  more  or  less,  a  point  is 
reached  where  the  proper  focus  is  obtained.  As  before 
mentioned,  the  head  of  the  operator  and  the  top  of  the 
camera  must  be  covered  with  a  black  cloth,  so  that  the 
sharpness  of  the  image  on  the  ground  glass  can  be  properly 
examined.  Fig.  55  represents  an  operator  focussing  a  person 
who  is  placed  before  him.  If  the  ground  glass  be  replaced 


42 


PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 


Fig.    9.  Camera,  or  Dark  Frame. 


by  a  glass  plate,  covered  with  sensitised  collodion,  an  image 
will  be  obtained  representing  the  model.  The  proper 
placing  of  the  sensitised  plate  is  accomplished  by  means 
of  a  frame  represented  in  Fig.  49,  and  which  is  always 

sold  with  and  forms  part  of 
the  camera.  This  frame,  or 
camera  back,  is  represented 
open,  in  order  to  make  the 
figure  better  understood.  The 
glass  plate,  coated  with  collo- 
dion, after  having  been  taken 
out  of  the  silver  bath  and  well 
drained,  is  placed  in  the  ca- 
mera frame,  with  the  layer  of 
collodion  towards  the  shutter 
a  (which  has  been  previously 
closed) ;  then  the  door  b  is 
shut  and  fastened  with  hooks, 
so  that  the  sensitised  layer 
is  thus  preserved  from  the 
light.  The  ground-glass  frame  is  then  removed  from 
the  camera,  and  the  frame  (Fig.  49)  put  in  its  place. 
If  the  thin  sliding  board  or  shutter  a  be  now  raised,  the 
sensitised  surface  of  the  glass  plate,  being  exactly  in  the 
same  position  as  occupied  by  the  ground  glass,  receives  the 
same  image.  When  it  is  thought  that  the  light  has  acted 
long  enough,  the  shutter  a  is  closed,  the  frame  removed, 
and  taken  into  the  dark  room,  where,  on  opening  the  door  6, 
the  glass  plate  is  removed,  and  submitted  to  an  operation 
to  be  described  under  the  title  of  developing  the  image. 

The  inner  portion  of  the  frame  that 
holds  the  sensitised  plate  has  project- 
ing corners  of  silver  wire,  so  arranged 
that  the  plate  only  touches  at  these 
parts.  Thus  the  woodwork  of  the 
frame  is  in  a  great  measure  protected 
from  the  corrosive  action  of  the  nitrate 
of  silver;  and  if  the  precaution  be 
taken  of  placing  a  piece  of  blotting - 

Fig.  50.  Glass  Frame.     PaPer  °n  the  lower  Comers  and  back  of 

the  plate,  previously  to  closing  the  door 
6,  the  risk  of  drops  of  nitrate  of  silver  injuring  the  frame, 


PHOTOGRAPHIC    CAMERAS,    LENSES,    ETC. 


and  falling  during  its  transport  from  the  dark  chamber 
to  the  operating  room,  will  be  avoided. 

With  a  camera  of  a  certain  size  it  is  very  often  required 
to  take  smaller  pictures,  as  well  as  the  full  size  the  lens 
will  produce.  This  is  accomplished  by  having  some  extra 
frames  of  wood  (Fig.  50)  fitting  into  the  larger  frame,  and 
carefully  adjusted,  that  when  the 
plate  is  placed  in  one  of  these  extra 
frames  its  surface  shall  be  exactly 
coincident  with  the  position  of  the 
ground  glass  upon  which  the  focus 
was  obtained  ;  if  otherwise,  it  would 
be  impossible  to  produce  a  sharp 
and  distinct  picture. 

The  glasses  employed  in  photo- 
graphy are  usually  of  patent  plate, 
although  good  ordinary  glass  may 
be  employed  for  very  small  sizes. 
The  glass  plates  are  kept  in  grooved 
wooden  boxes  (Fig.  51). 

There  are  two  kinds  of  photographic  lenses  —  those 
called  single  lenses,  for  views  ;  and  double,  or  combination 
lenses,  for  portraits. 

The  following  are  the  diameters  and  focal  lengths  of 
portrait  and  view  lenses  suitable  for  the  various  sized 
glasses  usually  employed  :  — 


51-  Plat9  Box- 


FOR    PORTRAITS. 


Size  of  Pictures. 
Inches. 


Ninth  size     .     .     . 
Quarter  plate     .     . 
Ditto  for  rapid  action 
Third  size  ditto 
Half  plate  ,.     .     . 
Whole  plate       .     . 

3b, 

5 
8$ 

y2 

0  1 

T 

44 

Diameter  of  Lenses. 

Focal  Length. 

Inches. 

Inches. 

.     it 

3J 

:    |    : 

5^ 

7 

'.       si 

7 
9J 

FOR   PORTRAITS    AND    GROUPS. 


Size  of  Pictures. 

Inches. 

9    by    7 

10     „     8 

12     „  10 

15     „  12 


Diameter  of  Lenses. 
Inches. 


a 


Focal  Length. 
Inches. 

13 
15 
19 


44:  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 


FOR    VIEWS. 

Size  of  Pictures.  Diameter  of  Lenses.        Focal  Length. 

Inches.  Inches.  Inches. 

6  by    5  ...  If  ...  8 

7  ,,     6  ...  2  ...         10 
9     „     7  ...           2|           ...         14 

12     „  10         ...  3  ...         16 

16     „  12         ...          4  ...         24 

The  single,  or  view  lens,  is  composed  of  an  achromatic 
lens,  mounted  in  a  tube  of  brass  (Fig.  52),  as  shown  in 
the  figure.  D,  the  brass  cover 
of  the  lens.  F,  a  small  brass 
tube,  holding  diaphragms  of 
various  sizes.  0,  the  brass  tube, 
having  the  lens  at  A  screwed 
within  it,  and  also  furnished  with 
an  outside  screw,  which  allows 
the  whole  mounted  lens  to  be 

52.  Single,  or  View  Lens.       fixed    t()    the    Hng    Qf    m^    ^ 

which  is  attached  to  the  front  of  the  camera. 

The  view  lens  is  used  in  the  following  manner  : — It 
is  fixed  to  the  camera  by  being  screwed  into  the  brass 
ring ;  the  cover  D  is  removed,  when  the  image  may  be 
focussed.  All  the  diaphragms  should  be  removed,  except 
the  one  to  be  employed.  The  smaller  the  opening  of  the 
diaphragm,  the  sharper  the  image  ;  but  then  a  longer 
time  will  be  required  to  produce  an  impression.  Thus, 
a  diaphragm  of  J  inch  requires  four  times  as  long  exposure 
as  one  of  -J-  inch  ;  but  then  the  picture  produced  is  much 
sharper.  It  is  thus  that  the  operator  can,  when  required, 
sacrifice  sharpness  of  detail  for  rapidity  of  action. 

The  lens  requires  from  time  to  time  to  be  cleansed  with 
a  soft  wash-leather ;  but  in  remounting  the  same  in  its 
cell,  it  is  of  the  greatest  importance  that  the  convex  side 
of  the  lens  should  be  towards  the  sensitive  plate.* 

The  compound,  or  portrait  lens,  is  composed  of  a 
greater  number  of  lenses.  It  has  a  compound  lens  in 
front,  which  is  very  thick,  being  formed  of  two  cemented 
together,  like  the  view  lens,  and  two  other  lenses  at  the 

*  View  lenses  are  sometimes  mounted,  with  the  diaphragms  or  stops 
fixed  in  the  large  tube  holding  the  lens,  which  either  slides  in  another 
tube  or  is  actuated  by  rackwork,  to  facilitate  the  obtaining  a  correct  focus. 


PHOTOGRAPHIC    CAMERAS,    LENSES.    ETC.  45 

back.  Whenever  the  lenses  are  removed  to  be  cleaned, 
or  for  any  other  purpose,  it  is  important  that  they  be 
replaced  in  exactly  the  same  order  as  when  purchased, 
otherwise  the  picture  produced  can  never  be  good  and 
sharp.  Fig.  53  shows  the  form  of  the  double,  or  com- 


Fig.  53.  Double,  or  Compound  Lens. 

pound  lens.  D  is  the  cover,  or  cap ;  B  G,  a  double  tube, 
sliding  one  over  the  other,  capable  of  being  adjusted  by 
turning  the  milled  head  F  connected  with  the  rackwork. 
Its  use  is,  after  the  focus  has  been  roughly  obtained,  by 
drawing  out  the  sliding  body  of  the  camera,  to  finally 
adjust  the  same  with  the  greatest  ease  and  nicety.  C  is 
a  portion  of  a  larger  tube,  adapted  to  screw  upon  the 
tube  B,  and  serves  to  protect  the  lens  from  lateral  rays 
of  light :  B,  A,  the  ends  where  the  lenses  are  fixed. 
G,  the  tube,  having  a  screw  at  the  end  for  the  purpose  of 
attachment  to  the  ring  E.  This  ring  of  metal  is  fixed  by 
screws  upon  the  front  of  the  camera.  H,  a  diaphragm, 
or  stop,  fitting  the  interior  of  the  tube  0. 

The  above  are  the  chief  points  of  difference  between 
the  two  varieties  of  lenses  known  as  the  single  and 
double.  The  brass  mountings  of  both  forms  are  blacked 
inside,  to  prevent  internal  reflection,  and  should  this  dull 
black  coating  be  at  any  time  ren- 
dered im'perfect,  it  can  be  repaired 
by  the  application  of  a  mixture  of 
lamp-black  and  gum -water.* 


*  In  the  most  recently  improved  form 
of  compound  lens,  the  sliding  body  is  pierced 
so  as  to  allow  a  series  of  diaphragms,  or 
stops,  to  be  introduced  between  the  two 
lenses,  as  shown  in  the  illustration,  Fief.  54. 

mi   •  •  •  • 

1  his  arrangement  is  more  correct  in  prin- 
ciple, and  produces  better  results,  than  the  simple  external  stop. 


4:6  FHOTOGKAPH1C    PKOCESSES. 

With  respect  to  the  optical  differences  of  these  two 
forms,  and  their  special  uses,  it  is  to  be  noted  that 
the  single  lens,  although  of  the  same  size  as  the  double 
combination,  does  not  give  so  brilliant  an  image  upon 
the  ground  glass,  because  the  diaphragms  intercept  an 
enormous  quantity  of  light.  The  double  lens,  on  the 
contrary,  has  two.  lenses,  combined  in  such  a  way  that  a 
diaphragm  is  not  necessary ;  consequently,  the  images  pro- 
duced are  well  illuminated.  By  stopping  off  a  single  lens, 
the  sharpness  of  the  image  is  rendered  perfect,  whereas 
with  the  double  combination  such  a  degree  of  sharpness 
cannot  be  obtained ;  therefore  the  first  is  employed  for 
views  and  buildings,  and  the  latter  for  portraits. 

Another  consideration  also  influences  the  selection. 
It  is  easy  to  be  understood  that  a  sensitive  coating  is 
impressed  more  easily  in  proportion  to  the  brilliancy  of 
the  light  striking  upon  it.  Thus,  a  lens  of  3  inches  in 
diameter,  with  J  inch  stop,  will  require  one  hundred  times 
longer  exposure  than  a  double  combination  of  lenses  of 
the  same  diameter  to  produce  the  same  picture.  Now,  is 
it  not  easy  to  expose  for  as  long  a  time  as  may  be  required 
for  a  view,  landscape,  flowers,  or  inanimate  objects,  so  as 
to  obtain,  what  ought  to  be  the  chief  aim,  extremely 
fine  detail  in  the  picture  ?  In  most  cases,  therefore, 
although  rapidity  can  be  gained  by  enlarging  the  stop, 
results  will  show  it  had  better  be  avoided.  With  the 
single  lens  just  mentioned,  a  view,  illuminated  with  the 
sun,  can  be  easily  obtained  in  twenty  to  thirty  seconds, 
and  if  there  be  any  persons  in  the  view,  they  will  without 
doubt  be  copied.  If,  with  the  same  single  lens,  an  endea- 
vour be  made  to  take  a  portrait  of  a  person  placed  in 
the  shade,  it  will  require  from  three  to  five  minutes.  Is 
it  possible  to  remain  so  long  without  moving  ?  Certainly 
not.  Now  the  double  lens  will  allow  such  a  portrait  to 
be  taken  in  ten  seconds ;  and  although  it  gives  a  picture 
not  quite  so  sharp  as  the  single  lens,  it  nevertheless  is 
greatly  preferable,  and  would  in  reality  produce  a  sharper 
picture,  for  with  the  single  lens  no  one  could  remain  per- 
i'ectly  immoveable  during  a  sufficient  time. 

In  certain  cases  it  is  also  necessary  to  use  a  stop  with 
the  double  combination  lens;  but  instead  of  a  stop  of 
^  to  J  inch  for  a  lens  of  3  inches  diameter,  one  of  from 
I  to  1J  inch  is  all  that  is  required.  Fig.  54  shows  such 


PHOTOGRAPHIC    CAMERAS,    LENSES,    ETC.  4:7 

a  stop  at  H  ;  it  is  placed  in  the  hood  0  of  the  lens,  and 
is  chiefly  employed  when  a  group  of  portraits  is  required 
to  be  taken.  For  the  purpose  of  more  clearly  compre- 
hending the  reason  for  the  use  of  a  diaphragm  when  taking 
groups,  &c.,  with  a  double  or  compound  lens,  it  may  be 
remarked  that,  the  more  extended  the  space  occupied  by  an 
object,  the  more  light  will  there  be  on  the  ground  glass  ; 
but  at  the  same  time,  with  the  double  lens  there  loillbe  less 
sharpness.  An  intermediate  course  is  therefore  adopted ; 
that  is  to  say,  a  diaphragm  is  employed,  whereby  a  loss 
is  incurred  in  the  matter  of  exposure  for  the  sake  of 
gaining  sharpness  and  definition. 

Generally  speaking,  a  single  lens  gives  so  perfect  a  defini- 
tion to  the  whole  of  the  object,  that  the  operation  of  obtain- 
ing a  good  focus  is  extremely  easy.  It  is  not  so,  however, 
with  the  double  combination  lens;  therefore,  as  a  rule,  the 
head  of  the  sitter  should  be  carefully  focussed,  and  a  little 
of  the  details  sacrificed,  if  necessary,  to  obtain  this  point. 

Compound  lenses  are  manufactured  and  sold  for  taking 
pictures  of  a  certain  size  ;  this  must  be  understood  to 
mean  the  utmost  of  their  capabilities,  and  those  photo- 
graphers who  may  be  desirous  of  obtaining  first-class  por- 
traits should  always  employ  a  larger  lens  than  is  absolutely 
required.  The  following  is  a  list  of  compound  lenses  par- 
ticularly adapted  to  produce  the  finest  portraits  of  the 
given  dimensions : — 

Size  of  Picture.  Diameter  of  Lens.          Length  of  Focus. 

Inches.  Inches.  Inches. 

4J  by  3J  ...         2|  ...  7 

6i  „  4f  ...         3J  ...  9! 

8J  „  6J  ...        4±          ...  11 

10     „  8  ...         4J          ...  15 

A  new  form  of  lens  has  lately  been  constructed  for 
views,  consisting  of  two  lenses,  which  allows  a  great 
degree  of  sharpness  to  be  obtained  with  more  flatness  of 
field  than  the  ordinary  single  lens.  They  are  termed 
orthoscopic  or  caloscopic.  In  a  special  note  (Note  8),  will 
be  given  a  description  of  some  of  the  principles  of  optics, 
a  proper  understanding  of  which  will  render  more  clear 
many  of  the  foregoing  details. 

For  taking  "  carte  de  visite  pictures  "  the  best  size  of 
compound  lens  that  can  be  employed  is  2f  inches  in  dia- 
meter and  5-inch  focus. 


4:3  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 


CHAPTEE  VIII. 

ON  THE  GLASS  ROOM  IN  WHICH  THE  SITTER  IS  PLACED, 
AND  THE  RULES  TO  BE  OBSERVED  IN  TAKING  PORTRAITS 
AND  LANDSCAPES. 

To  take  an  artistic  portrait,  or  to  choose  the  most  favour- 
able point  of  view  for  a  landscape,  requires  an  artistic 
taste  not  to  be  acquired  by  reading,  but  allied  in  its  cha- 
racter to  a  natural  instinct,  of  which  instruction  only 
develops  the  germ,  while  practice  simply  modifies  and 
perfects  the  details.  The  remarks  on  the  subject-matter 
of  this  chapter  will  therefore  be  of  an  essentially  practical 
nature. 

The  general  detail  and  arrangement  of  an  operating 
room  suitable  for  photographic  purposes,  is  represented 
in  the  cut  on  succeeding  page.  It  should  be  in  some 
elevated  position,  either  on  the  roof  of  the  house  or  on  a 
platform  specially  erected  for  the  purpose.  The  side  next 
the  south  should  be  entirely  closed,  whilst  the  other, 
towards  the  north,  is  glazed.  The  sheets  of  glass  em- 
ployed should  be  of  moderate  thickness,  as  a  protection 
from  storms  of  hail,  &c.,  and  as  white  as  possible — rather  of 
a  bluish  tint  than  approaching  at  all  to  a  green  or  yellow 
colour.  It  is  of  importance  to  attend  to  the  colour  of 
the  glass  used  for  the  operating  room,  for,  should  it  be  of 
a  green  or  yellow  tint,  a  considerable  amount  of  actinic 
rays*  are  cut  off,  and  the  exposure  necessary  for  a  good 
portrait  is  greatly  augmented. 

The  glass  rooms  should  be  furnished  with  curtains 
having  cords  attached  to  them,  by  means  of  which  the 
too  energetic  action  of  the  light  may  be  moderated,  and 
proper  direction  given  to  it.  In  the  figure  it  will  be 
seen  that  three  sets  of  squares  are  shown — the  upper  one 
(of  ground  glass),  which  is  parallel  with  the  floor  or 
ceiling ;  the  lower  one,  which  replaces  the  wall ;  and  the 
middle  one,  which  is  on  the  slope. 

*  Those  rays  of  light  which  produce  chemical  action,  and  are  found 
at  the  blue  and  violet  end  of  the  spectrum. 


THE    OPERATING    ROOM. 


49 


If  now,  with  the  object  of  producing  an  artistic  effect, 
it  be  desired  to  inundate  the  front  of  the  model  or  sitter 
with  light,  the  lower  and  middle  set  of  curtains  should  be 
more  or  less  closed.  If  a  lateral  lighting  be  desired,  the 
curtains  of  the  upper  window  should,  on  the  contrary,  be 


closed.     The  good  taste  of  the  operator  must,  however, 
guide  him  as  to  the  best  disposition  of  the  light. 

On  the  right  of  the  engraving,  Fig.  55,  is  represented 
the  shaft  of  a  column,  against  which  the  model  may  lean ; 
also  a  balustrade,  with  a  landscape  painted  in  distemper ; 


50  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

and  near  the  middle  a  white  marble  chimney-piece  of  the 
style  of  Louis  XV. ;  all  of  which  accessories,  or  others  of 
a  similar  character,  will  be  found  to  aid  in  imparting  a 
general  appearance  of  elegance  to  the  resulting  picture. 

The  colour  of  the  walls  exercises  a  marked  influence  on 
the  result.  They  should  not  be  painted  either  red,  yellow, 
or  green,  for  these  colours  have  a  very  weak  photographic 
action,  and  throwing  around  them,  as  they  do,  tints  of 
their  own  colour,  tend  to  prolong  very  materially  the  time 
of  exposure.  Violet  and  blue  colours  are  preferable,  but 
as  they  produce  whites  in  the  print,  and  as  a  wall  painted 
either  deep  blue  or  violet  produces  a  result  exactly  similar  to 
a  white  wall,  they  should  not  be  used  for  the  background, 
or  that  portion  behind  the  sitter.  Bluish  grey  is  a  mixed 
tint  which,  on  the  whole,  yields  the  best  results,  and  is 
a  colour  with  which  the  whole  of  the  glass  room  may  be 
painted,  except  that,  according  to  taste,  some  parts  may 
be  more  or  less  deep  than  others. 

It  will  be  found  very  convenient  to  have  several  move- 
able  backgrounds,  each  painted  with  a  different  depth 
of  colour,  so  as  to  be  used  according  to  the  colour  of  the 
dress,  &c.,  of  the  sitter,  and  thus  produce  the  most  effec- 
tive contrast. 

Oil  colour  is  very  disagreeable  on  account  of  its  reflec- 
tion. It  will  be  found  best  to  employ  a  mixture  of  slaked 
lime,  litmus,  and  lamp-black  with  which  the  whole  of  the 
room  may  be  painted,  simply  varying  the  proportion  of 
black.  The  same  colour  will  serve  to  paint  the  floor  of 
the  room;  but  if  a  carpet  be  employed  instead  of  paint, 
it  is  equally  important  that  it  should  be  of  a  greyish 
tint. 

In  reference  to  the  best  colour  for  dresses  to  be  worn 
by  sitters,  the  same  remarks  apply  as  have  been  made  re- 
specting that  of  the  glass  room ;  that  is  to  say — neutral 
tints,  analogous  to  grey,  violet,  and  blue,  come  out  well, 
while  red,  yellow,  and  green,  yield  results  of  an  oppo- 
site character.  By  increasing  the  exposure,  however,  in 
some  cases,  and  diminishing  it  in  others,  the  undue 
predominance  of  any  particular  tint  can  be  materially 
diminished. 

When  one  or  more  persons  are  to  be  taken,  they  should 
be  allowed,  in  the  first  place,  to  assume  an  easy,  natural 


THE    HEAD-REST. 


51 


position,  and  then,  by  placing  behind  each  a  head-rest, 
in  such  a  way  as  to  retain  them  in  the  position  chosen, 
the  required  steadiness  of  the  upper  portion  of  the  body 
is  secured. 

It  is  not  necessary  that  the  sitter  should  press  the  head 
too  strongly  against  the  head-rest,  but  on  the  contrary,  it 
should  only  lightly  touch ;  because  too  great  a  pressure 
restrains  the  respiration,  thus  imparting  to  the  sitter  an 
appearance  of  constraint  and  uneasiness. 

There  are  two  kinds  of  head-rests.  One  in  iron,  or  of 
iron  and  wood,  is  represented  in  Fig.  55.  The  lower 
part  consists  of  a  tripod  and  tube  of 
brass  weighing  about  40  Ibs.,  which  serves 
to  prevent  vibration  in  the  upper  por- 
tion, which  is  applied  to  the  head.  This 
consists  of  an  iron  tube  having  one  piece 
forked,  and  capable  of  being  adjusted  and 
fixed  by  a  screw  in  any  desired  position. 

These  head-rests  are  made  to  stand  on 
the  ground;  but  Fig.  56  shows  one  con- 
structed so  as  to  be  attached  to  a  chair. 

This  form  of  head -rest  is  generally  made 
of  hard  wood : — e  is  a  flat  piece  of  wood, 
to  be  adapted  to  the  back  of  a  chair ;  two 
clamping  screws,  //,  are  attached  to  it ; 
i  i  a  grooved  board  which  comes  behind 
the  chair.  It  may  be  easily  raised  and 
depressed,  and  is  fixed  in  any  desired 
position  by  turning  the  screws  f  f.  b  b, 
a  double -jointed  piece  for  adapting  to  the 
position  of  the  head,  and  capable  of  being 
fixed  by  means  of  the  screws  shown  in 
the  figure.  The  whole  of  this  piece  may 
be  raised  an<J  lowered,  and  fixed  at  d.  a 
is  a  moveable  forked  piece,  against  which  J 
the  sitter  leans.  It  will  be  easily  per-  f 
ceived  that  the  back  of  the  chair  must 
come  between  the  pieces  e  and  i  i.  _ 

Figure  55  shows  also  the  manner  of  Fiy  56  Head-rest. 
obtaining   a    focus,    in    connection    with 
which  may  be    observed  that   too  great  an    inclination 
should  never  be  given  to  the  camera ;    as  a   rule  it  is 
D  2 


52  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

best  to  have  the  lens  about  the  height  of  the  chest.  A 
very  slight  inclination  of  the  camera  will  then  be  suffi- 
cient to  get  a  correct  image  of  the  sitter  from  head 
to  foot. 

In  taking  a  portrait  from  a  sitting  position,  it  is  best 
to  lower  the  camera-stand  a  little,  and  thus  avoid  too  great 
distortion. 

The  nearer  the  camera  is  brought  to  the  sitter  the 
longer  the  exposure  ;  and  inversely,  the  further  the  camera 
is  removed,  the  shorter  the  exposure.  And  it  is  in  this 
way  that  the  time  of  exposure  may  be  varied  from  one 
second  to  three  hundred.  But  as  a  general  rule,  in  taking 
a  full-length  figure  in  summer,  the  plate  should  be  exposed 
twenty  seconds,  while  a  sitting  position  will  require  thirty 
seconds.  In  winter  these  times  of  exposure  should  be 
increased  one-half. 

The  following  is  a  general  summary  of  the  operations 
involved  in  taking  a  portrait.  The  direction  and  amount 
of  light  are  the  first  things  which  claim  attention,  then 
the  attitude  of  the  sitter.  Focussing  is  the  next  opera- 
tion, during  which  the  sitter  should  be  requested  to  keep 
still,  though  not  maintaining  perfect  immobility.  The 
plate  should  now  be  prepared  in  the  dark  room,  on  re- 
turning from  which  any  alteration  which  may  have  taken 
place  in  the  pose  of  the  sitter  during  the  absence  of  the 
operator  is  corrected,  and  efforts  made,  by  cheerful  con- 
versation, to  induce  an  agreeable  expression.  Then, 
when  everything  seems  in  order  and  ready,  a  final  and 
rapid  adjustment  of  the  focus  is  made;  the  focussing- 
glass  is  withdrawn  and  replaced  by  the  camera-back, 
containing  the  sensitive  plate.  The  lens  is  now  un- 
covered and  the  plate  exposed,  the  necessity  of  complete 
stillness  having  been  previously  enjoined  on  the  sitter, 
explaining,  however,  at  the  same  time,  that  he  may 
breathe  in  the  ordinary  way,  and  if  necessary  wink,  but 
not  move  his  eyes  from  the  spot  where  first  directed. 
The  time  of  exposure  having  expired,  the  lens  is  covered 
and  the  slide  of  the  camera-back  closed,  and  the  develop- 
ment proceeded  with  in  the  dark  room. 

With  reference  to  the  means  to  be  employed  to  estimate 
the  time  of  exposure  in  seconds,  it  will  be  found  best  to 
read  the  time  from  a  good  watch  with  a  second-hand, 


RULES    FOR    TAKING    VIEWS    AND    PORTRAITS.  53 

though  the  same  object  may  be  attained  by  suspending 
a  leaden  or  wooden  ball  by  means  of  a  cord  39^-  inches 
long.  If  the  pendulum  so  constructed  be  made  to  oscil- 
late, it  will  be  found  to  mark  seconds  of  time  with 
sufficient  accuracy. 

It  has  been  already  mentioned  in  chapter  seven,  that 
lenses  of  a  different  construction  are  necessary  for  land- 
scapes from  those  which  are  used  for  portraits.  For 
views  and  architectural 'subjects  a  single  achromatic  lens 
is  sufficient,  but  for  portraits  a  double  combination  is 
necessary.  It  has  also  been  stated  that  the  form  of 
camera-stand,  Fig.  46,  and  cameras,  Figs.  47  -and  48, 
are  those  most  applicable  for  landscape  photography. 

The  rules  which  can  be  given  for  taking  views  are 
much  more  simple  than  those  for  portraits.  In  point  of 
fact,  success  depends  mainly  on  the  taste  of  the  operator 
in  selecting  the  landscape  which  he  desires  to  reproduce, 
and  the  particular  point  of  view  from  which  it  is  seen. 
The  focussing  is  accomplished  in  the  ordinary  manner. 

It  is  only  necessary  to  add,  that  views  are  taken  by 
the  wet  as  well  as  the  dry  collodion  process.  With  the 
latter  all  that  is  required  is  a  grooved  plate -box,  con- 
taining some  prepared  plates,  a  camera-stand,  and  a  large 
black  cloth  with  which  to  cover  the  legs  of  the  camera- 
stand,  when  it  becomes  necessary  to  replace  an  exposed 
plate  by  one  which  has  not  received  the  luminous  impres- 
sion. With  the  wet  collodion  process,  a  photographic 
tent,  or  a  light  tent  carriage,  is  indispensable  ;  and  the 
operator  must  also  take  with  him  all  the  paraphernalia 
of  dishes,  baths,  bottles,  &c.,  which  form  the  necessary 
furniture  of  a  dark  room. 

Notwithstanding  these  difficulties,  the  wet  collodion 
process  is  to  be  preferred  for  the  reproduction  of  archi- 
tectural subjects  and  landscapes  near  great  cities.  But 
for  a  long  voyage,  the  dry  collodion  process  is  certainly 
the  best. 

In  the  wet  collodion  process,  the  nature  of  the  result 
(good  or  bad)  is  known  at  once  on  the  ground  ;  while 
with  dry  plates  the  character  of  the  picture  is  not  ascer- 
tained until  the  development  is  effected,  which  almost 
invariably  takes  pjace  at  a  great  distance  from  the  locality 
in  which  the  view  was  taken. 


54:  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

Iii  large  cities  and  flat  countries  it  is  very  easy  to  have 
a  tent  or  light  carriage  of  waterproof  cloth,  carried,  or 
drawn  if  need  be,  by  a  porter  or  guide — an  arrangement 
which  offers  the  advantage  of  allowing  the  operator  to 
stop  wherever  he  pleases,  and  conduct  the  work  with 
great  facility. 

Generally,  before  taking  views,  a  preliminary  visit  is 
made,  with  the  object  of  ascertaining  the  best  points  of 
view,  and  on  such  occasions  the  iconometer,  or  view 

meter,  Fig.  57,  is  found 
very  convenient.  It  re- 
quires to  be  expressly 
constructed  for  each 
focus  of  lens  and  size 
of  camera,  and  resem- 
bles very  much  in  ap- 
pearance an  opera-glass. 

Fig.  57.  Iconometer.  V  .  * 

It   consists    of    a   small 

lens,  a  camera,  of  the  shape  of  an  opera-glass,  and  a  square 
focussing  glass.  By  turning  the  lens  towards  the  view  it 
is  represented  reversed  on  the  ground  glass ;  and  in  this 
way  the  operator  can  judge  whether  his  large  camera 
will  take  in  the  whole  or  what  portion  of  the  required 
view. 

Instead  of  the  iconometer  with  lens  and  ground  glass, 
a  more  simple  one  may  be  employed,  which  in  many 
respects,  however,  is  similar  to  that  indicated  in  Fig.  57. 
The  observation  is  made  through  the  front  opening,  and 
on  the  large  circle  behind  (to  the  left  in  the  figure)  a 
rectangle  is  described  equal  to  that  which  is  yielded  by 
the  lens  attached  to  the  camera.  It  is  then  only  neces- 
sary to  observe  what  objects  are  included  in  the  field  of 
vision,  in  order  to  ascertain  what  will  be  reproduced  on 
the  ground  glass.  The  iconometer  with  lenses  is,  how- 
ever, the  most  convenient  for  general  use,  as  it  affords  an 
opportunity  of  knowing  whether  in  the  case  of  taking  an 
architectural  subject,  for  example,  the  operator  is  or  is 
not  too  close,  for  then  the  vertical  lines  incline  towards 
a  point,  like  the  furrows  in  a  horizontal  field. 


DEVELOPMENT    OF    THE    IMAGE.  55 


CHAPTER  IX. 

DEVELOPMENT    OF     THE     LATENT    IMAGE    OBTAINED    IN    THE 
CAMERA-OBSCURA. 

As  soon  as  the  proper  time  has  elapsed  for  exposure,  the 
sensitised  plate  must  be  withdrawn  from  the  light  by 
closing  the  shatter  of  the  camera-back,  which  is  then 
taken  into  the  dark  room.  After  carefully  closing  the 
shutter  in  front  of  the  yellow -glass  window,  the  plate  is 
removed  from  the  frame.  If  it  be  now  examined,  there 
will  very  rarely  be  any  traces  of  a  picture  ;  it  can,  how- 
ever, be  made  apparent  by  covering  the  surface  which 
has  been  exposed  to  the  light  with  a  solution  of  some 
substance  capable  of  reducing  the  salts  of  silver  to  the 
metallic  state. 

Among  the  reducing  agents  which  can  be  employed  in 
photography,  may  be  mentioned  protonitrate  of  iron, 
sulphate  of  iron,  pyrogallic  acid,  protosulphate  of  uranium, 
protosalts  of  osmium  and  titanium,  (fee. ;  but  of  all  these, 
pyrogallic  acid  will  be  found  the  best  for  developing  the 
negatives,  and  protosulphate  of  iron  for  obtaining  direct 
positives  on  glass. 

Pyrogallic  acid  is  a  white  crystalline  solid,  without 
smell.*  It  is  soluble  in  water,  alcohol,  and  ether,  and 
its  solution  in  either  of  these  menstrua  becomes  rapidly 
decomposed  on  exposure  to  the  air  and  light,  especially 
if  the  solution  be  alkaline.  This  substance  alters  very 
soon  even  when  it  is  dry.  If  a  small  amount  of  moisture 
be  present,  however,  the  decomposition  proceeds  with 
increased  rapidity,  being  expedited  by  the  foreign  matter 
which  it  contains.  Thus  it  is  better — -first,  to  keep 
the  pyrogallic  acid  bought  in  shops  in  small  stoppered 
bottles  ;  secondly,  to  keep  it  in  the  dark ;  thirdly,  never 
to  prepare  with  it  more  developing  solution  than  is  likely 
to  suffice  for  a  day's  consumption.. 

It  is  usual  to  add  to  the  pyrogallic  some  other  acid,  as 

*  For  its  method  of  preparation  see  Note  7« 


OO  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

much  to  preserve  the  solution  as  to  develop  the  picture 
uniformly  ;  distilled  water  also  must  be  employed,  or  at 
least  rain-water,  well  filtered  :  that  which  is  obtained 
during  a  storm  contains  ammonia  or  nitric  acid,  and  is 
therefore  unfit  for  use. 

Solution  of  pyrogallic  acid  for  developing,  is  thus  pre- 
pared : — A  flask  of  about  1  pint  capacity  is  obtained,  and 
made  perfectly  clean  ;  to  this  is  adapted  a  funnel,  fur- 
nished with  a  filter,  as  shown  in  Fig.  11.  Upon  this  filter 
throw  15  grs.  of  pyrogallic  acid  ;  then  15  ozs.  of  distilled 
water  being  measured  off,  and  1  oz.  of  crystallisable  acetic 
acid*  being  added  thereto,  the  whole  is  well  stirred  with 
a  glass  rod,  and  poured  on  to  the  filter  containing  the 
pyrogallic  acid,  which  latter  dissolves  as  the  liquid  is 
passing  through.  The  filtration  being  complete  the  funnel 
is  removed,  and  the  flask  stopped  lightly  with  a  cork,  and 
set  aside  for  use  in  the  dark. 

MM.  Davanne  and  Girard  have  proposed  the  substi- 
tution of  citric  for  the  acetic  acid,  in  which  case  the 
following  formula  may  be  employed  : — 

Distilled  Water 12  fluid  ounces. 

Pyrogallic  Acid 15  grains. 

Citric  Acid    15       „ 

"Whichever  formula  is  adopted,  the  method  to  be  followed 
to  develop  the  picture  is  precisely  the  same ;  and  it  is 
important  to  note  that  the  development  should  take  place 
as  soon  as  possible  after  the  plate  is  sensitised,  and  on  no 
account  should  a  longer  time  than  five  minutes  be  allowed 
to  elapse  between  these  operations. 

The  plate,  on  removal  from  the  frame,  is  held  by  one 
corner  (the  same  by  which  it  was  held  when 
the  collodion  was    poured    over   it) ;    then 
a  sufficient  quantity  of  the  developing  solu- 
tion to  cover   the   plate   being  placed  in   a 
glass  (Fig.  58),  is  poured  by  a  continuous 
operation  over  the  collodion  surface,  and  the 
plate    inclined  alternately  in  every   direc- 
Ftg' 58'        tion,-in  order  that  the   whole  film  may  be 
covered  without  delay.    Then  suddenly  turn  the  plate  up- 

*  See  Note  11. 


DEVELOPMENT    OF    THE    IMAGE.  Of 

right,  holding  it   by   the   opposite  corner   to  that  from 
whence  the  liquid  flows  into  the  glass. 


Fig.  59.  Developing  a  Negative  Proof. 

The  same  solution  is  again  poured  on  the  plate,  inclin- 
ing it  constantly  from  right  to  left,  in  order  that  the  liquid 
may  be  kept  in  continual  motion.     The 
image  gradually  appears ;  and  when  it  is 
considered  sufficiently  developed,  the  plate 
is  washed  by  dipping  it,  at  first  very  care- 
fully, into  a  shallow  porcelain  tray,  filled 
with  water ;  it  is  then  placed  under  a  small 
stream  of  water,  after  which  it  is  fixed. 
It  is  desirable,  for  washing  the  plate,  to 
use    a   little    apparatus    represented    in 
Fig.  60.     It  is  simply  a  flask,  filled  with 
distilled  water.     The  cork  is  perforated, 
so  as  to  admit  of  the  passage  of  two  tubes. Fi[ 
The  highest — that  which  is  to  be  blown  through — passes 
D  3 


58 


PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 


through  the  cork,  and  terminates  directly  under  it ;  the 
other,  on  the  contrary,  rests  in  the  water  at  the  bottom  of 
the  bottle.  The  draughtsman  has  reversed  this  arrange- 
ment in  the  figure  by  mistake. 

In  using  this  wash-bottle,  it  is  held  by  the  neck  while  the 

operator  blows  through 
the  higher  tube,  by  which 
means  the  water  is  pro- 
jected through  the  exit 
tube,  and  may  be  directed 
over  the  surface  of  the 
film,  beginning  at  the 
centre,  and  passing  gradu- 
ally to  the  edges,  thus 
avoiding  disruption.  Fig. 
61  shows  the  operation 
better  than  any  verbal 
description. 

In  order  to  avoid  taking 
the  plate  in  the  hand,  an 
India-rubber  plate-holder 
is  sometimes  employed 
with  advantage.  Fig.  62 
shows  a  glass  plate  at- 
tached to  such  a  plate - 

i.  washing  the  Film.  holder.     To  do  this  the 

plate  is  placed  on  a  level  table,  arid  the  holder  grasped 
by  the  globe  part  in  such  a  way  as  to  force  out  the  air  ; 
the  edges  are  then  moistened,  in  order  to  make  them 
adhere  more  perfectly,  and  the  pressure  is  withdrawn  at 

the  moment  of  bringing 
the  plate-holder  in  con- 
tact with  the  glass  by 
pressing  the  edges  of  it. 
Although  the  air  has 
been  forced  out  of  the 
bottle,  its  elastic  sides 
re -assume  their  shape, 
and  the  vacuum  left  in- 
side causes  the  plate  to 
Fig.  62.  Pneumatic  Plate-holder.  adhere  very  firmly  to 

the  plate -holder.     To  detach  it,  it  is  only  necessary  to 


DEVELOPMENT    OF    THE    IMAGE.  59 

compress  the  bottle  as  before.  The  picture  having  been 
developed  and  washed,  is  now  fixed,  an  operation  to  be 
described  in  the  next  chapter. 

The  process  of  developing  the  picture,  although  appa- 
rently simple,  is,  nevertheless,  a  very  delicate  one,  and 
one  on  which  depends,  in  great  measure,  the  success  of 
the  positive  proof;  it  will  not,  therefore,  be  out  of  place  to 
enter  a  little  more  into  detail.  The  latent  image  produced 
by  the  action  of  light  upon  the  iodide  of  silver,  is  brought 
out  by  the  action  of  pyrogallic  acid,  aided  by  the  nitrate 
of  silver,  with  which  the  collodion  film  is  impregnated. 
If  too  much  pyrogallic  developing  solution  is  poured  from 
the  developing  glass  on  to  the  plate,  the  details  of  the 
picture  appear  but  slowly,  and  if  too  little  there  will  not 
be  enough  to  cover  the  plate  completely ;  thus  the  medium 
lies  between  the  two  extremes. 

Sufficient  developing  solution  should  be  poured  into 
the  glasb  to  cover  the  plate  freely  and  completely,  and  no 
more  ;  and  this  should  be  poured  on  and  off,  and  allowed 
to  flow  in  various  directions,  in  order  to  facilitate  the 
mixture  of  the  developer  with  the  adherent  nitrate  of 
silver.  By  this  method  of  manipulating  it  will  be  found 
that  the  development  proceeds  uniformly,  and  may  be 
observed  from  time  to  time  by  examining  the  plate  by 
transmitted  light,  as  indicated  in  Fig.  59. 

The  development  is  continued  according  to  the  pre- 
ceding directions  until  the  required  amount  of  intensity  is 
obtained,  and  the  plate  is  then  rinsed  with  water  to  remove 
the  developing  fluid,  so  as  to  prevent  its  continued  action. 

At  an  ordinary  temperature  the  picture  is  generally 
sufficiently  developed  in  two  minutes ;  but  if  it  is  necessary 
to  force  the  development,  it  will  seldom  prove  a  successful 
picture.  At  a  higher  temperature  it  sometimes  becomes 
necessary  to  stop  the  development  in  half  a  minute,  to  pre- 
vent the  high  lights  from  becoming  too  dense.  Experience 
alone  can  give  the  knowledge  necessary  to  determine 
exactly  the  when  and  how  in  this  delicate  operation. 

As  soon  as  the  solution  of  pyrogallic  acid  covers  the 
plate,  the  sky  and  the  high  lights  of  the  picture  begin  to 
appear  on  the  primrose-tinted  film  of  iodide  of  silver ;  a 
few  seconds  after,  the  minor  details  make  their  appearance, 
becoming  more  and  more  vigorous,  and,  as  often  occurs 


60  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

in  a  landscape,  the  sky  darkens  so  much,  that  it  is  even 
difficult  to  see  the  sun  through  it.  This  will  give  an  idea 
of  the  amount  of  intensity  which  the  image  acquires  ;  and, 
without  experience,  it  is  very  difficult  to  indicate  the 
exact  moment  when  the  pyrogallic  acid  should  be  removed 
by  treatment  with  cold  water. 

The  quantity  of  acetic  acid  added  to  the  pyrogallic 
also  exercises  an  important  influence  on  the  results,  and 
in  proportion  as  it  is  increased  the  more  slowly  the  image 
appears,  and  the  more  vigorous  it  is  in  character.  When, 
for  example,  a  negative  has  to  be  developed  taken  from 


Fig.  63.  Positive  Proof.    From  a  Stereoscopic  View  by  Ai.  j 

a  group  of  persons  among  whom  there  are  some  having 
on  white  dresses,  a  large  proportion  of  acetic  acid  is 
necessary;  while,  on  the  contrary,  a  dull,  grey,  sombre 
monument  develops  best  with  a  small  proportion  of  acetic 
acid.  The  time  and  character  of  the  development  of  a 
picture  also  enables  a  conclusion  to  be  arrived  at,  as  to 
whether  the  exposure  in  the  camera  has  been  too  long  or 
too  short. 


DEVELOPMENT  OF  NEGATIVES.  61 

In  this  latter  case  it  is  with  difficulty  that  the  sky  and 
the  other  high  lights  of  the  picture  are  developed,  and 
detail  in  the  shadows  is  never  obtained ;  even  after  long 
waiting  the  image  will  not  appear,  in  which  case  it  is 
necessary  to  take  a  fresh  negative. 


Fig.  64.  Negative  Proof,  examined  on  the  Side  of  the  Glass  not  covered 
with  Collodion. 

If,  on  the  contrary,  the  exposure  has  been  too  long,  the 
negative  is  red  and  uniform  ;  after  fixing,  there  is  an 
absence  of  vigour  in  the  blacks,  and  there  is  a  general 
fogging  spread  over  every  part  of  the  image ;  the  develop- 
ment also  ,has  taken  place  very  rapidly.  In  each  case 
another  negative  must  be  taken. 

The  most  frequent  error  is  over-exposure,  arising  from 
an  inability  to  realise  the  possibility  of  taking  a  picture 
in  so  short  a  time. 

For  the  purpose  of  illustration,  suppose  the  monument 
represented  at  Fig.  63,  representing  a  portion  of  the 
Acropolis  at  Athens,  is  to  be  reproduced. 

The  sun  illuminates  these  statues  with  all  its  meridian 


62  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

splendour;  strong  shadows  are  therefore  a  necessary  con- 
sequence, which,  in  order  to  be  correct,  ought  to  be  in 
the  negative. 

Beginning  with  a  negative  which  shall  not  have  been 
exposed  in  the  camera  more  than  five  seconds,  and  suc- 
cessively increasing  the  time  of  exposure,  five  seconds  in 
a  series  of  five  negatives,  the  following  will  be  the 
result : — 

The  first  negative  will  be  very  slow  in  developing  ; 
after  several  minutes  the  sky  will  with  difficulty  be  traced, 
and  some  faint  indication  may  be  obtained  of  the  parts 
most  strongly  lighted. 

In  the  second  these  portions  will  have  acquired  much 
more  vigour,  and  the  shadows  even  will  begin  to  yield 
some  indication  of  detail.  The  third  negative  will  be  a 
good  one ;  but  the  fourth  will  be,  in  every  respect,  all 
that  could  be  desired,  possessing  a  due  amount  of  vigour, 
and  presenting  the  aspect  of  Fig.  64. 

The  fifth  negative,  although  exposed  a  longer  time, 
will  have  acquired  a  greyish  colour.  A  good  negative  is 
blue  ;  but  too  long  an  exposure  gives  it  a  dull  grey  ap- 
pearance. The  shadows,  instead  of  being  transparent, 
like  glass  itself,  have  upon  them  a  sensible  deposit,  owing 
to  the  too  rapid  development. 

In  proportion  as  the  exposure  is  increased  in  any  sub- 
sequent negative,  the  grey  colour  tends  to  become  red ; 
there  is  a  difficulty  almost  in  distinguishing  the  shadows 
and  the  sky ;  and,  in  one  word,  the  negative  loses  all  its 
vigour. 

The  above  are  the  principles  upon  which  the  photo- 
grapher should  proceed  in  the  correction  of  his  negatives. 

It  would  be  useless  to  pretend  that  an  accurate  judg- 
ment can  be  formed  except  by  long  experience.  It  is  not 
until  after  several  months  of  assiduous  research,  and  after 
continual  disappointment,  that  the  beginner  will  acquire 
that  accuracy  of  judgment  at  a  glance  which  will  guide 
him  in  the  fugitive  indications  of  the  amount  of  exposure 
necessary  for  a  given  subject ;  but,  when  once  this  know- 
ledge is  acquired,  he  will  be  amply  rewarded  by  the 
small  number  of  defective  negatives,  as  well  as  by  the 
amount  of  photographic  knowledge  acquired  during  the 
apprenticeship. 


SPOTS  AND  MARKINGS. 


63 


It  frequently  happens  that  negatives  are  spotted,  or 

covered  with  curious  markings,  either  in  parts  or  entirely. 

The  four  accompanying  figures  are  some  examples  of 


Fig.  68. 


these  spots,  taken  from  M.  de  la  Blanchere's  work ;  the 
description  of  them,  together  with  practical  directions  for 
their  avoidance,  will  be  found  in  Note  9  at  the  end  of 
the  volume. 


64:  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 


CHAPTER  X. 

FIXING    AND   STRENGTHENING    THE    NEGATIVE    IMAGE. 

IT  has  been  before  stated  that  when  the  image  is  suffi- 
ciently developed,  the  plate  should  be  washed  with 
water,  so  that  the  pyrogallic  acid  may  be  well  removed. 
Should  the  film  show  any  tendency  to  detach  itself,  this 
operation  must  be  performed  with  considerable  care.  The 
email  shutters  may  now  be  opened,  so  as  to  uncover  the 
whole  of  the  yellow  windows.  The  light  in  the  dark 
room  is  thus  increased,  although  it  still  retains  its  yellow 
tint. 

The  result  thus  obtained  is  a  negative  image,  but  still 
partly  obscured  with  iodide  of  silver,  which  is  now  to  be 
removed.  For  this  purpose  it  must  be  plunged  into  a  bath 
composed  as  follows  : — 

Water 40  ounces. 

Hyposulphite  of  Soda  8  ounces. 

In  about  half  a  minute,  if  the  bath  is  fresh,  and  some  few 
minutes  if  the  bath  has  been  much  used,  all  the  yellow 
coating  of  iodide  of  silver  is  dissolved,  and  there  remains 
on  the  collodion  film  only  the  pure  silver  compound  con- 
stituting the  photographic  image. 

Hyposulphite  of  soda  is  a  crystallised  substance,  very 
soluble  in  water4,  and  can  be  purchased  at  a  very  cheap 
price. 

The. solution  of  hyposulphite  of  soda  may  be  contained 
in  a  vessel  of  zinc  or  gutta-percha.  It  does  not  stain  the 
hands ;  on  the  contrary,  it  will  remove  recent  stains  of 
nitrate  of  silver. 

Great  care  should  be  taken  that  the  vessel  containing 
the  bath  of  hyposulphite  be  kept  separate,  and  that  the 
fingers  be  well  washed  before  proceeding  to  take  another 
picture,  because  contact  with  this  salt  spoils  both  the 
collodion  and  nitrate  of  silver  bath. 

In  fixing  the  proof,  it  should  not  be  allowed  to  remain 


FIXING    AND    STRENGTHENING    THE    NEGATIVE.          65 

too  long  in  the  bath  of  hyposulphite,  otherwise  the  fine 
details  will  be  injured.  The  entire  solution  of  the  iodide 
of  silver  is  easily  perceivexl  by  examining  the  back  of  the 
glass.  The  iodide  of  silver  being  of  a  pale  yellow  colour 
is  easily  seen,  and  it  is,  however,  necessary  that  the  last 
traces  of  this  colour  be  allowed  to  disappear.  When  this 
result  is  obtained,  the  glass  plate  should  be  taken  out  and 
plunged  into  a  bath  of  cold  water. 

The  solution  of  hyposulphite  will  serve  a  considerable 
time  before  it  is  exhausted,  and  then  it  is  of  so  little  cost 
that  a  fresh  solution  is  easily  made. 

When  the  negative  proof  is  immersed  in  the  hyposul- 
phite, the  vessel  containing  it  may  be  taken  to  the  day- 
light, which  will  enable  the  operator  better  to  see  when 
the  yellow  coating  of  iodide  of  silver  is  quite  removed. 
Ordinary  daylight  from  this  time  has  no  action  on  the 
picture. 

After  the  fixing  is  complete,  it  is  of  the  greatest 
importance  thoroughly  to  wash  the  collodion  surface, 
especially  if  a  great  number  of  proofs  are  to  be  printed 
from  it;  this  becomes  more  difficult  when  the  coating  has 
a  great  tendency  to  detach  itself  from  the  edges  of  the 
glass.  Nevertheless,  even  under  these  circumstances, 
with  a  little  attention  it  may  be  perfectly  washed.  When 
the  collodion  is  good,  and  especially  if  the  gun-cotton 
has  been  prepared  according  to  the  formula  indicated 
in  Note  3,  there  will  not  be  the  least  fear  of  such  an 
accident.  • 

When  the  film  appears  liable  to  detach  itself,  the  small 
apparatus,  Fig.  60,  which  has  already  been  described,  is 
made  use  of.  The  current  of  water  is  carefully  directed 
from  the  middle  of  the  plate  towards  the  edges,  constantly 
varying  the  inclination  in  such  a  way  that  the  water 
always  flows  from  the  centre  towards  the  sides.  By  these 
means  the  coating  is  prevented,  as  far  as  practicable,  from 
being  totally  removed.  Care  must  also  be  taken  when 
the  glass  is  left  to  drain,  as  the  coating  wrinkles  and 
bends  by  its  own  weight.  This  effect  shows  itself  while 
the  coating  is  yet  quite  wet.  When  the  excess  of  water 
lias  disappeared,  a  little  care  will  enable  the  coating  to  be 
drawn  to  its  proper  position  by  the  aid  of  the  finger. 

To  properly   wash  the  coating   the    glass    should    be 


66  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

placed,  during  five  minutes  at  the  least,  in  a  large  vessel 
of  zinc  filled  with  water.  If  the  coating  separates  in  any 
part  the  glass  must  be  very  gently  removed,  and  the 
detached  parts  arranged  and  brought  together  by  a 
very  fine  and  light  jet  of  water  applied  to  the  required 
places.  We  have  often  in  this  way  replaced  a  film  upon 
the  glass  after  it  has  been  entirely  removed  and  torn  at 
the  edges,  and  in  spite  of  all  obtained  good  results. 

If  the  glass  be  not  sufficiently  washed  after  removal 
from  the  hyposulphite,  the  film  becomes  sticky,  and  after 
awhile  disappears  altogether,  or,  at  least,  becomes  strongly 
stained. 

It  is  after  removal  from  the  hyposulphite  of  soda  that 
the  proof  can  be  best  examined  as  to  its  quality.  It  ought 
to  be  of  a  bluish  colour ;  the  sky  and  high  lights  a  strong 
black,  and  the  deep  shades  nearly  transparent. 

If  at  this  moment  a  good  photographer  judges  that  his 
negative  is  wanting  in  vigour,  he  commences  another; 
but  if  this  is  impracticable,  recourse  must  be  had  to  inten- 
sify ing.  This  operation  must  be  done  after  the  proof  is 
fixed  and  washed,  and  before  it  is  dried. 

Generally  speaking,  an  intensified  negative  is  worth 
but  little ;  and,  to  repeat,  a  good  operator  will  rather  re- 
commence another  negative  than  intensify.  However,  if 
required,  the  best  method  is  as  follows  : — 

The  glass  plate,  after  the  rinsing  which  follows  the 
fixing,  is  plunged  into  a  porcelain  vessel  containing  a 
solution  of  bichloride  of  mercury  in  water. 

Water 10  ounces. 

Bichloride  of  Mercury to  saturation. 

(To  saturate  the  water  with  bichloride  of  mercury,  this 
Bait,  after  being  powdered,  is  introduced  into  a  bottle 
filled  with  water,  and  well  agitated.) 

In  a  few  minutes  the  coating  assumes  a  milky-white 
appearance.  The  plate  is  now  removed  and  washed  with 
the  greatest  care,  and  then  plunged  into  a  solution  of 

Water 10  ounces, 

Liq.  Ammonia 1  ounce; 

when  it  immediately  becomes  darkened.  On  being  taken 
from  this  bath  the  plate  is  washed  with  water,  and  then 
placed  against  the  wall  to  drain  and  dry. 


VARNISHING    THE    PICTURE. 


67 


The  best  method  of  drying  glass  plates  consists  in 
placing  them  (Fig.  69)  resting 
by  their  upper  edge  against  the 
wall,  and  their  lower  edge  upon 
a  sheet  of  bibulous  paper,  which 
very  quickly  absorbs  the  excess 
of  water. 

If  the  plate  is  required  to  be 
quickly  dried,  the  coated  sur- 
face ought  to  be  from  the  wall ; 
and,  on  the  contrary,  if  it  is  re- 
quired to  be  slowly  dried,  the 
coated  surface  is  placed  towards 
the  wall.  In  this  latter  case, 
the  particles  of  dust  do  not  so 
readily  attach  themselves  to  the 
surface  of  the  picture. 

The  intensifying  which  we  have  described  is  very 
powerful ;  but  it  is  capable  of  being  regulated,  by  leaving 
the  plate,  for  a  few  seconds  only,  in  the  bath  of  bichloride 
of  mercury.  The  less  time  the  plate  is  in  the  solution, 
the  smaller  the  quantity  of  ammonia  required  to  darken 
it.  After  a  few  years,  a  proof  intensified  by  this  method 
loses  its  vigour,  and  becomes  even  more  feeble  than  it 
was  before.  Several  other  methods  for  intensifying  have 
been  proposed  in  various  photographic  works ;  none  of 
them,  however,  can  be  recommended  in  preference  to 
that  described.  At  the  same  time,  if  a  good  proof  be  not 
obtained  at  the  first  attempt,  by  far  the  better  plan  will 
be  to  try  again,  as  it  is  by  this  means  alone  that  real 
perfection  can  be  attained  in  the  photographic  art. 


Fig.  69. 


CHAPTER  XI. 

VARNISHING    THE    PICTURE. 


WHEN  the  proof  is  fixed,  washed,  and  dried,  its  surface 
exhibits  by  reflected  light  a  fine  metallic  appearance ;  if 
the  development  has  been  carried  too  far,  the  coating 


bS  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

appears  covered  with  a  metallic  dust,  which,  however, 
can  be  partially  removed  with  the  aid  of  a  very  soft 
brnsli.  By  transmitted  light  the  picture  has  an  entirely 
different  appearance,  perfectly  opposite  to  that  exhibited 
by  reflection. 

As  a  collodion  negative  is  required  to  furnish  a  consi- 
derable number  of  positive  proofs  upon  paper,  and  for 
which  purpose  the  collodion  surface  requires  to  be  placed 
in  contact  with  the  sensitive  paper,  it  becomes  necessary 
to  protect  this  coating  by  a  sufficiently  hard  varnish,  so 
that  the  plate  can  be  easily  handled  without  risk ;  other- 
wise the  soft  coating  would  be  very  liable  to  injury. 

There  are  two  excellent  varnishes  suitable  for  the  pur- 
pose— amber  varnish,  and  the  white  gum,  or  Soelinee 
varnish. 

The  amber  varnish  is  thus  prepared.  A  quantity  of 
yellow  amber,  broken  into  small  pieces,  is  placed  in  a 
bottle  so  as  to  occupy  about  three -fourths  of  its  capacity. 
A  mixture  of  equal  parts  of  chloroform  and  ether  is  now 
poured  into  the  bottle,  in  such  a  quantity  that  the  amber 
is  hardly  covered.  After  some  few  days  the  liquid  con- 
tents of  the  bottle  are  poured  upon  a  filter,  and  the  pale 
yellow  liquid  which  passes  through  is  amber  varnish. 

The  solid  fragments  of  amber  are  allowed  to  remain 
in  the  bottle,  to  which  can  be  again  added  the  mixture  of 
chloroform  and  ether,  and  a  fresh  quantity  of  varnish 
obtained.  The  same  amber  will  serve  for  a  dozen  or 
more  times,  if  care  be  taken  to  keep  the  bottle  well  closed. 

To  prepare  the  gum -lac,  or  Soehnee  varnish,  place  in  a 
bottle — 

Gum-lac  White * 21  ounces. 

Alcohol 35  ounces. 

The  bottle*  is  now  well  stopped  and  left  several  days, 
being  well  agitated  at  frequent  intervals  ;  the  liquid  is 
then  left  to  settle  as  much  as  possible,  the  clear  portion 
poured  off,  and  the  remainder  filtered.  The  whole  of 
the  liquid  can  be  filtered  ;  but  it  is  not  recommended,  as 
it  passes  very  slowly  through  the  paper.  The  colour  of 
this  varnish  is  of  a  pale  yellow,  less  deep  than  the 
chloroform. 

Instead  of  making  this  preparation  in  a  bottle  at  the 
ordinary  temperature,  it  will  be  found  a  more  expeditious 


VARNISHING    THE    PICTURE.  69 

plan  to  employ  a  flask  (containing  the  materials),  placed 
in  hot  water.  If  the  flask,  thus  kept  heated,  he  agitated 
from  time  to  time,  the  gnm-lac  can  be  dissolved  in  about 
half  an  hour.  There  is  always  a  whitish  deposit,  which 
does  not  dissolve  either  in  cold  or  hot  alcohol ;  this  must 
be  allowed  to  perfectly  settle  before  the  varnish  is  poured 
off  for  use. 

The  amber  varnish  is  very  easily  applied  ;  the  collodion 
surface  of  the  plate,  on  which  the  picture  is  formed,  is 
covered  with  it  in  the  same  way  as  the  collodion  was 
applied,  the  excess  of  liquid  being  received  in  the  bottle. 
In  a  few  seconds  this  varnish  is  dry.  It  is  well,  however, 
to  expose  the  plate  for  an,  hour  to  the  sun  before  being 
used  for  printing  from. 

It  is  more  difficult  to  make  use  of  the  white  gum-lac 
varnish,  because  the  plate  then  requires  to  be  warmed. 
For  this  purpose  it  is  carefully  exposed  to  the  flame  of  a 
spirit  lamp,  or  before  a  clear  fire,  taking  care  that  the 
heat  is  equally  applied  by  moving  about  the  glass  plate 
at  some  distance  from  the  fire,  or  above  the  flame,  if  this 
be  employed. 

The  temperature  of  the  glass  should  be  such  that, 
when  applied  to  the  back  of  the  hand,  it  can  i>e  borne 
without  inconvenience.  If  too  hot,  the  varnish  flows 
with  difficulty  over  the  surface;  and  if  too  cold,  it  does 
not  dry  sufficiently  quick,  and  becomes  chilled  or  partially 
opaque.  This  varnish  is  applied  like  collodion,  the 
excess  being  received  in  the  bottle,  and  when  the  surface 
appears  dry,  the  heat  is  continued  a  short  time  longer,  so 
as  to  cause  a  proper  transparency  and  adhesion  of  the 
coating. 

It  is  especially  difficult  to  use  the  gum-lac  varnish  for 
plates  of  large  size,  for  which,  all  things  considered,  it 
is  generally  best  to  employ  the  amber  varnish.  The 
negatives  are  less  firmly  varnished,  and,  in  consequence, 
not  able  to  yield  so  large  a  number  of  proofs ;  but,  on  the 
other  hand,  it  is  much  more  easily  applied. 

It  constantly  happens  that  a  number  of  transparent 
round  spots  appear  on  the  negative,  which  require  stop- 
ping out  before  the  positive  proofs  are  obtained  from  it, 
otherwise  these  white  spots  would  form  corresponding 
black  ones  on  the  prints,  which  cannot  be  removed.  If, 


70  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

on  the  contrary,  the  spots  on  the  negative  be  black  or 
opaque,  white  spots  are  formed  on  the  positive  proof, 
which  are  comparatively  easy  to  be  touched  out  by  a 
little  water  colour. 

Touching  out  a  negative  requires  very  careful  manipu- 
lation, and  a  properly  arranged  apparatus  for  the  purpose 
will  be  found  very  convenient,  Fig.  70.  The  wooden  top 


Fig.  70.  Apparatus  for  touching  out  Glass  Proofs. 

of  a  small  table  is  removed,  and  a  thick  sheet  of  glass, 
supported  by  an  iron  framing,  is  substituted.  Below  is 
arranged  a  large  sheet  of  white  paper,  stretched  upon  a 
frame,  or  else  a  looking-glass,  of  which  the  inclination 
can  be  varied  by  some  such  contrivance  as  shown  in  the 
figure. 

The  light  reflected  from  the  looking-glass  or  paper, 
enables  the  proof,  which  is  laid  on  the  glass -plate  form- 
ing the  top  of  the  table,  to  be  conveniently  examined  by 
transmitted  light. 

The  transparent  spots  are  then  touched  out  with  a  very 
fine  camel's  hair  pencil,  and  some  dark  colour  mixed  with 


THE  DRY  COLLODION  PROCESS.  71 

honey  or  oil.*  Some  persons  touch  out  the  spots  with 
Indian  ink,  mixed  with  a  small  quantity  of  Prussian  blue, 
before  the  plate  is  varnished.  This  plan,  however,  cannot 
be  recommended,  as  the  subsequent  varnishing  is  apt  to 
destroy  the  colour  applied. 

Light  spots  on  paper  proofs  are  easier  to  touch 
out  with  water  colour  of  the  same  tint  as  the  print, 
than  glass  negatives  are :  therefore,  whenever  circum- 
stances allow  a  choice  to  be  made,  preference  should  be 
given  to  the  former.  For  example,  if  there  should  be  a 
white  spot  on  the  negative,  with  which  nothing  can  be 
done,  it  will  be  better  to  make  it  a  black  one,  which,  by 
printing  white  on  the  paper  proof,  can  be  then  easily 
tinted  of  the  proper  colour. 


CHAPTER  XII. 

THE    DRY    COLLODION,  COLLODIO-ALBUMEN,   AND    TANNIN 
PROCESSES. 

1.   The  Dry  Collodion  Process. 

ONE  of  the  most  unfortunate  circumstances  connected 
with  the  practice  of  photography  on  wet  collodion,  is  the 
necessity,  in  travelling,  for  the  photographer  to  employ 
a  tent,  which  adds  greatly  to  his  luggage.  This  incon- 
venience is  due  to  the  fact  that  the  operations  of  sensi- 
tising and  developing  must  quickly  follow  each  other,  for, 
if  too  long  a  time  elapses  between  them,  the  nitrate  of 
silver  crystallises  on  the  surface  of  the  glass,  and  causes 
an  infinite  number  of  small  spots  to  be  formed  over  the 
entire  surface  of  the  picture. 

If  the  glass  plate,  covered  with  its  sensitised  coating 

*  M.  de  la  Blanchere  gives  the  following  formula : — 

Peroxide  of  Iron,  or  Rouge ;  Chromate  of  Lead, 

or  Ivory  Black 10  parts. 

Gum  Arabic,  Saturated  Solution 2     „ 

White  Honey 2     „ 

Sugar  Candy 1  part 


72  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

of  collodion,  be  washed  with  distilled  water  when  re- 
moved from  the  silver-bath,  and  left  to  dry,  it  loses 
nearly  all  its  sensibility,  and  will  give  but  very  imperfect 
pictures. 

M.  Desprats  and  M.  Dubosq  have  partially  remedied 
this  fault :  the  former,  by  adding  half  per  cent,  of 
resin;  the  latter,  some  few  drops  of  amber  varnish  to  the 
collodion ;  in  whichever  of  the  two  methods  it  is  pre- 
pared, it  must  be  used  exactly  as  ordinary  collodion, 
with  the  exception  that  when  the  glass  is  removed  from 
the  silver-bath,  it  is  to  be  well  washed  and  dried  in  the 
dark.  Plates  thus  prepared  will  preserve  their  sensibility 
for  many  days.  The  time  of  exposure  in  the  camera 
ought  to  be  tripled,  and  the  development  made  with  solu- 
tion of  gallic  acid. 

M.  Dupuis  recommends  the  adoption  of  the  following 
process.  Ordinary  iodised  collodion  is  employed,  and  the 
glass  plate  after  being  sensitised,  is  well  washed  in  distilled 
water.  A  solution  of  dextrine,  in  ten  times  its  weight  of 
water,  is  left  to  settle,  and  then  decanted,  so  as  to  be  free 
from  impurities.  A  requisite  quantity  of  this  solution  is 
poured  over  the  sensitised  glass  plate,  recently  washed, 
and  while  still  moist,  in  such  a  manner,  that  it  spreads 
evenly  over  its  surface  ;  it  is  then  drained  and  dried. 

The  plates  thus  prepared  will  keep  good  for  several 
days ;  but  the  time  of  exposure  in  the  camera  must  be 
tripled,  that  is  to  say,  if  with  wet  collodion,  30  seconds  of 
exposure  is  required,  it  will  be  requisite  to  give  90  with 
a  plate  prepared  with  dextrine. 

Before  developing  the  plate,  it  is  washed  with  pure 
water.  An  apparatus,  consisting  of  a  flat-bottomed 
flask,  &c.,  similar  to  that  described  page  57,  is  useful 
for  this  purpose.  The  picture  is  developed  with  pyro- 
gallic  acid. 

A  great  number  of  other  dry  processes  have  been  pro- 
posed ;  but  two,  above  all  others,  have  obtained  the  prefer- 
ence of  the  photographic  public,  as  well  in  England  as  in 
France  and  Germany,  these  are  the  collodio  albumen 
process  of  M.  Taupenot,  and  the  tannin  process  of 
Major  Russel.  These  two  processes  will,  therefore,  be 
described  in  all  their  details. 


THE    COLLODIO-ALBUMEN    PROCESS.  73 

2  The  C  ollodio-albumen  Process. 

As  by  this  process  a  considerable  number  of  plates  can 
be  prepared  in  a  few  hours,  which  is  very  convenient, 
especially  for  obtaining  stereoscopic  positive  proofs  upon 
glass,  which  will  presently  be  described.  The  following 
will  be  found  an  excellent  method,  and  one  which  will 
enable  a  hundred  of  these  plates  to  be  properly  pre- 
pared, in  two  operations  of  four  hours'  continuous  work, 
it  being  understood  that  the  glasses  do  not  exceed  the 
dimensions  of  9  inches  by  7  inches,  and  that  they  are  all 
cleaned  beforehand. 

In  the  dark  room  are  arranged  two  vessels  of  gutta- 
percha,  one  beside  the  other,  both  containing  a  silver-bath 
composed  of — 

Water 35  ounces. 

Fused  Nitrate  of  Silver 1050  grs. 

One  bath  only  may  be  employed,  but  with  two  the  opera- 
tion, as  will  be  perceived,  is  much  quicker. 

Ordinary  negative  collodion  may  be  used,  but  it  will 
be  found  an  improvement  if  the  collodion  is  a  little  less 
iodised,  such  as  is  obtained  by  adding  to  the  ordinary 
collodion — of  which  the  formulae  has  been  given  at  page  22 
— one  third  of  its  volume  of  a  mixture  of  about  two  parts 
of  ether  and  one  of  alcohol. 

Collodion,  ordinary,  (page  22) 3  ounces. 

Ether,  5  fluid  drs.  \  ,  __ 

Alcohol,  3  do /   '  -1  ounce. 

For  the  purpose  of  facilitating  the  description,  the 
glass  plates  will  be  designated  by  the  letters  A,  B,  C,  and 
the  nitrate  of  silver  baths  by  numbers  1  and  2. 

A  glass,  A,  is  coated  with  collodion  and  plunged  into 
the  first  silver-bath  (No.  1).  A  second  glass  is  now 
coated  with  collodion,  and  plunged  into  the  second  bath 
(No.  2). 

By  the  side  of  the  silver-baths  should  be  placed  a 
vessel  of  gutta-percha  of  considerable  depth,  and  filled 
with  filtered  rain-water,  or  better,  with  distilled  water. 
This  bath  ought  to  be  as  capacious  as  possible. 

When  the  first  glass,  A,  has  been  a  sufficient  time  in 
the  silver-bath,  No.  1,  which  is  ascertained  by  the  dis- 

E 


74:  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

appearance  of  the  greasy  veins  which  have  been  spoken 
of  at  page  35,  it  is  taken  out  and  placed  in  the  bath  of 
water  contained  in  the  vessel  of  gutta-percha. 

A  third  glass,  0,  is  then  coated  with  collodion  and 
plunged  into  the  silver-bath,  No.  1,  from  which  the  first 
glass  was  taken,  and  then  the  glass  in  the  bath  of  water 
is  removed,  and  placed  in  a  large  wooden  tub  (Fig.  71) 
tilled  with  rain-water,  and  sufficiently  large  to  hold  from 
eight  to  ten  glasses,  placed  side  by  side. 


Fig.  71.  Tub  for  Washing  Plates. 

The  second  glass,  B,  is  now  taken  from  the  silver-bath 
and  plunged  into  the  bath  of  water  in  the  gutta-percha 
vessel.  It  is  left  here  while  another  glass  is  coated  with 
collodion  and  sensitised,  and  when  that  is  finished  the 
second  glass,  B,  is  taken  from  the  water,  to  be  placed  in 
that  contained  in  the  large  vessel  Fig.  71.  The  plate,  C, 
is  removed  to  the  bath  of  water,  a  fresh  plate  inserted, 
and  the  same  series  of  operations  repeated  for  the  number 
of  prepared  plates  required. 

It  will  be  understood  that  this  method  of  preparation 
being  a  continuous  one,  is  necessarily  very  rapid.  When 
the  large  vessel  of  water  is  filled  with  plates,  they  are  to 
be  taken  out  and  placed  inclined  against  the  wall,  resting 
at  the  bottom  on  some  bibulous  paper,  and  with  their 
prepared  or  collodionised  surfaces  towards  the  wall,  as 
described  at  page  67. 

If  the  operation  be  conducted  on  a  small  scale,  with 
one  glass  at  a  time,  then,  when  the  first  plate  is  taken 
from  the  silver-bath  and  plunged  into  the  water-bath, 
another  plate  is  coated  with  collodion  and  placed  in  the 
nitrate -bath,  and  during  the  time  it  has  to  remain  in  it, 


THE    COLLODIO-ALBUMEN    PROCESS. 


75 


the  first  plate  is  removed  to  a  fresh  quantity  of  water 
contained  in  a  trough  of  wood  or  gutta-percha. 

Whichever  method  be  employed,  the  result  will  be  the 
same,  provided  that  care  be  taken  to  remove  the  whole 
of  the  nitrate  of  silver,  which  covers  the  plates,  with 
abundance  of  water ;  if  the  trough  be  small,  the  water 
must  be  often  changed;  but  if  it  be  of  large  size,  this 
may  be  dispensed  with. 

When  the  whole  of  the  plates  are  prepared,  some 
solution  of  common  salt  is  added  to  the  water  contained 
in  the  gutta-percha  trough. 

A  white  precipitate  is  formed  of  chloride  of  silver, 
which  can  be  retained  until  of  sufficient  quantity, 
with  other  residuums,  to  be  reduced  into  metallic 
silver  by  fusion  in  an  earthen  crucible  with  carbonate  of 
soda. 

Each  glass  plate  should  remain  in  the  water  at  least 
ten  minutes,  and  ought  to  be  kept  upright,  the  better 
to  remove  all  the  soluble  salt  of  silver  from  the  texture 
of  the  collodion  coating. 

The  glasses,  coated  with   collodion  and  washed  as  just 
described,  must  be  covered  while  still 
moist,  with  iodised  albumen,  which  is 
thus  prepared: — 

Fresh  fowls'  eggs  are  broken 
across  the  middle,  the  whites  care- 
fully separated,  and  then  poured  into 
a  glazed  earthen  vessel,  to  which  is 
added  a  quantity  of  iodide  of  potas- 
sium, equal  to  7  J  grains  to  the  white 
of  each  egg  employed.  Before  adding 
the  iodide  of  potassium  to  the  white 
of  egg,  it  should  be  dissolved  in  an 
equal  weighjb  of  water  ;  for  example, 
if  ten,  twenty,  or  fifty  eggs  be  used, 
75,  150,  or  375  grains  of  iodide  of 
potassium  are  required,  dissolved  in 
75,  150,  or  375  grains  of  water. 

The   whole  is   then  beaten   completely  into  froth  by 

means  of  a  bundle  of  twigs,  represented  at  Fig.  72,  or  of 

tinned  iron   wire,  mounted  in  a  handle,  Fig.  73.     This 

froth  is  left  to  itself  in  a  glazed  earthen  vessel,  Fig.  74:, 

E  2 


Fig.  72.         Fig.  73. 


76  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

for  twelve  hours,  when  the  greater  portion  is  resolved 
into  clear  albumen,  which  can  be  poured  off  into  a  wide- 
mouthed  bottle.  This  iodised  albumen  is  used  to  pour 
over  the  collodionised  glasses  after  they  have  been  taken 
from  the  trough,  Fig.  71,  and  drained  for  one  or  two 
minutes  on  a  wooden  shelf,  Fig.  69. 


Fig.  74.  Albumen  beaten  into  Froth. 

M.  Taupenot  employed  fermented  albumen  ;  but  it  is 
now  not  generally  used  or  to  be  recommended. 

Iodised  albumen  can  be  preserved  for  a  considerable 
time  during  winter,  but  in  summer  it  is  apt  to  decompose 
very  rapidly.  It  should  be  kept  in  well-closed  bottles 
in  a  cool  place. 

During  the  time  that  some  of  the  glasses  require  to 
remain  in  the  silver-bath,  those  which  have  been  drain- 
ing against  the  wall  are  to  have  a  small  quantity  of  the 
albumen  poured  on  each,  and  allowed  to  run  over  every 
portion  of  the  moist  collodion  surface  ;  the  glass  is  then 
held  vertically,  so  as  to  allow  the  excess  of  liquid  to  flow 
into  a  separate  bottle,  which,  for  the  sake  of  distinction, 
will  be  called  B. 

A  fresh  quantity  of  the  iodised  albumen  is  now 
poured  on  the  glass,  and  made  to  flow  over  every  portion 
of  its  surface,  the  excess  being  received  back  into  the 
bottle. 

The  glasses  thus  albumenised  are  left  to  dry,  the 
upper  part  of  each  leaning  against  the  wall,  and  the 
lower  resting  on  some  blotting-paper,  as  shown  at  Fig.  69.^ 


THE    COLLODIO-ALBUMEN    PROCESS.  77 

The  albumenised  surface  should  be  towards  the  wall,  to 
avoid  dust. 

The  reason  for  giving  the  plates  two  coatings  of 
albumen  is  that  the  tirst  application  serves  to  remove  the 
water  which  impregnates  the  collodion  surface  and  allows 
the  second  quantity  to  give  a  perfectly  uniform  coating. 
The  albumen  contained  in  the  bottle,  B,  can  be  used  a 
considerable  number  of  times  for  giving  the  first  coating 
or  until  it  becomes  too  diluted  with  the  water  derived 
from  the  plates,  when  a  fresh  quantity  must  be  used ; 
whereas,  that  employed  for  the  second  coating,  on  the 
contrary,  can  be  used  as  often  as  required. 

The  glasses,  when  removed  from  the  bath  of  water, 
should  not  be  allowed  to  dry  before  being  albumenised, 
otherwise  the  albumen  is  spread  with  difficulty  on  the 
surface,  and  stains  are  subsequently  produced. 

The  albumen  should  not  be  applied  sparingly  to  the 
glass,  but  at  the  same  time  it  should  not  be  allowed  to 
flow  over  to  the  back  of  the  plate  ;  if  this  should  happen, 
it  is  best  removed,  when  perfectly  dry,  with  some  bibulous 
paper  moistened  with  water. 

Walking  about  the  room  when  the  albumenised  glasses 
are  being  left  to  dry  should  be  avoided  as  much  as 
possible,  so  as  to  prevent  any  particles  of  dust,  <fec., 
settling  on  them.  In  about  twelve  hours  they  will  be 
sufficiently  dry,  when  they  can  be  preserved  for  an  in- 
definite time,  if  placed  in  a  grooved  box  to  protect  them 
from  damp  and  the  direct  light  of  day. 

All  the  foregoing  operations  are  to  be  done  in  the 
dark  room,  and  when  finished,  the  water  in  the  large 
bath  may  be  thrown  away,  but  that  in  the  smaller  bath 
of  gutta-percha  should  be  retained,  for  the  purpose  of 
precipitating  the  silver  it  contains,  as  before  described. 

The  following  is  a  resume  of  the  first  series  of  opera- 
tions, in  their  proper  order,  that  each  glass  undergoes : — 

1.  Cleaning. 

2.  Coating  with  collodion. 

3.  Sensitising. 

4.  Washing   for  a  few  moments  in  the   first  bath  of 

water  contained  in  the  gutta-percha  vessel. 

5.  Washing   a   second  time  in  a  bath,  where  it  is  left 

for  several  minutes. 


78  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

6.  Leaving  to  drain. 

7.  Coating    with  iodised    albumen,  which,    has  been 

before  used  for  removing  the  excess  of  water. 

8.  The   immediate    application  of  another  coating  of 

fresh  iodised  albumen. 

9.  Lastly,  leaving  it  to  drain  and  dry. 

On  the  evening,  or  at  most  the  day  before  requiring  to 
use  the  plates  for  taking  views,  they  must  be  submitted 
to  a  second  series  of  operations,  so  as  to  render  the 
iodised  albumen  surface  sensitive  to  light. 

A  great  number  of  albumenised  glasses  may  by  pre- 
pared at  a  time,  because  they  can  be  kept  for  an  indefinite 
period  ;  whereas,  no  greater  number  of  them  should  be 
sensitised  than  will  be  used  in  a  very  short  time,  as  they 
then  rapidly  deteriorate  by  keeping. 

For  sensitising  the  glasses  a  bath  of  aceto-nitrate  of 
silver  is  required,  composed  of — 

Distilled  Water 16  ounces 

Glacial  Acetic  Acid 1      „ 

Fused  Nitrate  of  Silver , H     „ 

This  bath  requires  to  be  filtered  before  being  used,  and 
a  gutta-percha  dish  should  be  employed  for  it.  After 
being  used  for  a  few  weeks  it  becomes  of  a  yellowish 
tint,  that  can,  however,  be  removed  by  being  shaken  up 
with  some  kaolin.  As  a  matter  of  precaution  the  kaolin 
may  always  remain  at  the  bottom  of  the  bottle,  and  the 
liquid  decanted  from  it  when  used. 

At  the  side  of  the  bath  of  aceto-nitrate  of  silver  should 
be  placed  another  of  much  larger  size,  filled  with  filtered 
rain-water. 

An  albumenised  glass  is  immersed  with  one  quick 
movement  into  the  aceto-nitrate  of  silver,  and  left  there 
for  fifteen  seconds  or  more,  it  is  then  placed  in  the  bath 
of  rain-water,  which  is  shaken  a  short  time  so  as  to 
remove  the  excess  of  nitrate  of  silver.  This  being  done, 
it  is  taken  out  of  the  water  and  left  to  dry  against  the 
wall  in  the  manner  previously  described.  It  is  almost 
needless  to  say  that  the  operation  of  sensitising  must  be 
done  in  the  dark  room  with  a  yellow  light.  The  glasses 
thus  sensitised,  when  dry,  are  ready  to  receive  the  im- 
pression in  the  camera,  after  which  they  can  be  kept  for 


THE    COLLODIO-ALBUMEN    PROCESS.  79 

a  fortnight  before  being  developed,  although,  as  a  rule, 
the  shorter  time  that  elapses  between  the  sensitising  and 
development  the  better  will  be  the  result.  To  obtain 
good  proofs,  not  more  than  three  days  should  intervene 
between  the  two  operations.  In  summer  especially,  the 
time  should  be  as  short  as  possible ;  in  winter  it  may  be 
longer  without  so  much  risk  of  injury. 

The  sensitised  glasses  ought  to  be  preserved  in  grooved 
boxes  free  from  chinks  or  cracks  through  which  the 
daylight  might  pass,  and  kept  as  dry  as  possible. 

When  required  for  use  they  are  placed  in  the  ordinary 
collodion  frame  for  views.  There  are,  however,  some 
frames  particularly  devised  for  dry  plates,  which  hold 
two  glasses  and  have  two  slides,  first  one  of  the  glasses 
is  exposed  to  the  light,  and  then  the  other,  by  simply 
turning  round  the  frame. 

The  time  of  exposure  for  a  collodio-albumenised  plate 
is  fully  double  or  treble  that  required  for  ordinary  collo- 
dion. Experience  alone  will  guide  the  operator  in  this 
particular. 

As  the  pictures  are  generally  developed  after  returning 
from  an  excursion,  it  is  an  excellent  plan,  to  ensure  a 
good  proof  of  any  particular  view,  building,  &c.,  to  take 
two  impressions,  but  with  different  times  of  exposure. 

The  collodio -albumen  process  is  also  particularly  well 
adapted  for  obtaining  transparent  positives  on  glass. 
For  this  purpose  the  sensitised  surface  of  the  prepared 
plate  is  put  in  contact  with  the  varnished  surface  of  the 
negative,  and  placed  in  a  close  frame  similar  to  that  used 
for  exposing  the  plate  in  the  camera.  By  opening  the 
sliding  shutter  the  diffused  light  of  day  is  allowed  to  act 
for  three  or  four  seconds,  taking  care  that  in  arranging 
the  glasses  in  the  frame,  the  light  passes  through  the 
negative  before  striking  the  sensitised  plate.  The  plate 
is  then  taken  into  the  dark  room,  and  developed  in  the 
ordinary  manner. 

When  this  process  is  followed  the  positive  picture 
obtained  has  a  very  good  effect  if  placed  before  a  win- 
dow ;  it  should  be  mounted  with  a  plate  of  ground  glass, 
the  albumenised  surface  of  one  in  contact  with  the 
ground  surface  of  the  other,  and  the  two  plates  united 
by  a  border  of  black  paper  pasted  round  the  edges. 


80  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

The  following  is  the  method  of  developing  the  col- 
lodio -albumen  plateo  : — 

Place  in  a  porcelain  capsule  15  grains  of  gallic  acid, 
and  pour  over  it  3£  ounces  of  hot  distilled  water,  and 
mix  them  well  with  a  glass  rod ;  when  the  gallic  acid  is 
dissolved,  or  nearly  so,  add  13  ounces  of  cold  water,  and 
filter  the  whole  into  a  bottle  for  use. 

This  liquid  is  poured  into  a  porcelain  dish  to  about 
the  depth  of  an  inch,  and  to  each  quantity  of  three  ounces 
employed  is  to  be  added  one -fourth  of  a  drachm  of  the 
following  solution : — 

Distilled  Water 35  ounces. 

Fused  Nitrate  of  Silver 230  grains. 

Glacial  Acetic  Acid 9  minims. 

And  care  should  be  taken  that  the  whole  be  thoroughly 
mingled  together,  otherwise  stains  will  be  formed  on  the 
surface  of  the  negative. 

The  exposed  albumenised  plate  is  to  be  quickly 
plunged  into  this  liquid,  the  coated  surface  upwards, 
and  raised  up  and  down  for  several  times  by  means  of  a 
hook  so  that  the  fluid  flows  well  over  its  surface.  It  is 
necessary  that  the  porcelain  dish  should  be  adapted  for 
the  purpose,  and  with  a  flat  bottom  so  that  the  glass 
may  be  perfectly  immersed  in  the  solution. 

At  the  end  of  the  first  hour  or  two  the  sky  and  other 
parts  highly  illuminated  will  hardly  have  made  their 
appearance,  but  in  the  succeeding  two  hours  the  proof 
usually  comes  out  with  extreme  vigour.  It  is  always 
well  to  watch  this  operation  so  as  to  stop  it  so  soon  as 
the  development  is  complete,  which,  however,  sometimes 
takes  as  long  as  twelve  hours.  The  colder  the  weather 
the  longer  the  time  required.  In  winter  it  is  preferable, 
and  sometimes  necessary,  to  develop  in  a  warmed 
apartment. 

Very  often  in  about  three  or  four  hours  the  develop- 
ment of  the  image  can  be  accelerated  by  renewing  the 
gallic  acid  and  doubling  the  dose  of  nitrate  of  silver, 
that  is  to  say,  to  each  3  ounces  of  solution  of  gallic  acid 
add  a  half  instead  of  a  quarter  drachm  of  the  aceto- 
nitrate  of  silver;  but  if  this  is  done  the  dish  must  be  kept 
agitated,  otherwise  the  particles  of  reduced  silver  which 


THE    COLLODIO-ALBUMEN    PROCESS.  81 

are  formed  would  attach  themselves  to  the  picture  and 
entirely  spoil  it. 

To  succeed  well,  two  conditions  are  indispensable — a 
warm  room,  about  68°  Fahr.,  and  a  slow  development. 
It  is  also  very  important  that  the  gallic  acid  should  not 
be  allowed  to  become  coloured  and  muddy  ;  if  this  should 
happen,  the  glass  must  be  washed,  so  as  to  remove  the 
thick  and  decomposed  gallic  acid  from  its  surface,  and 
placed  in  another  dish  with  some  fresh  solution  of  gallic 
acid,  to  which  has  been  added  a  less  quantity  of  aceto- 
nitrate  of  silver  than  was  employed  at  first. 

This  last  observation  is  most  important,  and  the  opera- 
tion is  one  that  cannot  be  too  often  repeated ;  with  a 
proper  attention  to  the  time  of  exposure  and  consequent 
regulation  of  the  doses  of  gallic  acid,  the  picture  should 
be  well  and  perfectly  developed  in  about  four  hours. 

To  finish  off  the  proof,  it  is  washed  with  water  when 
taken  from  the  gallic  acid  bath,  and  fixed  with  hypo- 
sulphite of  soda  in  the  manner  described  for  the  ordinary 
wet  process — a  final  washing  completes  the  picture.  It 
is  useless  to  varnish  the  plate,  as  the  albumen  itself 
forms  an  excellent  preservative  coating. 

As  the  beauty  of  a  collodio-albumen  proof  greatly 
depends  upon  the  proper  time  of  exposure  in  the  camera, 
it  may  be  useful  to  give  some  of  the  indications  of  a  too 
short  or  too  lengthened  action  of  light. 

If  the  exposure  has  been  too  short,  the  picture  does 
not  come  out  well  even  after  twelve  hours  of  develop- 
ment and  repeated  changing  of  the  gallic  acid  solution, 
the  sky  alone  is  distinctly  marked,  all  the  other  parts  of 
the  proof  have  *a  general  grey  tint,  without  the  least 
vigour.  Nothing  can  remedy  this  fault.  If,  on  the  con- 
trary, the  exposure  has  been  too  long,  the  sky  shows 
itself  very  quickly,  as  well*  as  the  other  light  parts  of  the 
picture.  In*  about  an  hour  the  proof  exhibits  a  con- 
siderable amount  of  intensity  in  all  its  details.  If  the 
development  be  now  stopped,  a  passable  picture  may  be 
obtained  ;  but  if  it  be  continued,  the  whole  of  the  image 
becomes  grey,  and  the  sky,  although  apparently  very 
dark,  because  viewed  by  reflection  from  a  white  ground, 
is,  nevertheless,  also  grey.  Over  exposure  is  likewise  indi- 
cated by  a  red  tint,  which  the  proof  takes  after  being  fixed. 
F  3 


82  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

"When  the  time  of  exposure  has  been  correct,  the  sky 
begins  to  show  itself  in  about  an  hour,  and  very  gradually 
increases  in  intensity,  and  becomes  of  an  absolute  black, 
even  when  viewed  as  a  transparency  after  fixing.  The 
whole  of  the  details  are  shown  with  great  vigour,  while 
the  shadows  are  perfectly  transparent. 

If  the  sky  should  not  be  sufficiently  dark,  and  it  is  not 
possible  to  take  another  proof,  recourse  may  be  had  to 
stopping  out  with  a  little  Indian  ink  mixed  with  honey 
and  water,  and  a  soft  camel's  hair  pencil.  It  is,however, 
next  to  impossible  to  do  this  operation  in  such  a  manner 
that  some  of  the  details  on  the  horizon  are  not  injured. 

3.   The  Tannin  Process. 

This  dry  process  derives  its  name  from  the  use  of 
tannin — a  bitter  principle  obtained  from  gall-nuts — 
as  a  preservative  agent.  To  Major  Russell  is  due  the 
credit  of  having  introduced  it. 

The  glass  to  be  prepared  should  be  cleaned  with  great 
eare,  particularly  from  any  greasy  substances.  This  is 
conveniently  done  with  a  mixture  of  Tripoli  powder, 
spirits  of  wine,  and  solution  of  ammonia.  A  tuft  of 
cotton  is  dipped  into  this  mixture  and  rubbed  over  its 
surface  for  a  minute  or  so ;  then  well  rinsed  in  water  and 
rubbed  dry  with  a  clean  cloth. 

The  glass,  just  before  being  used,  should  be  wiped 
with  a  perfectly  dry  and  warm  cloth,  and  then  coated 
with  the  following  solution  : — 

Nelson's  Patent  Gelatine ;  20  grains. 

Distilled  Water 10  ounces, 

Alcohol \  ounce. 

Dissolve  and  filter;  this  solution  will  keep  good  for  a 
considerable  time. 

This  gelatine  solution  is  applied  to  the  glass  in  the  same 
way  as  ordinary  collodion,  taking  care  that  the  whole  of 
the  surface  is  covered,  and  that  the  back  of  the  plate  be 
not  soiled.  The  superfluous  liquid  is  received  back  into 
the  bottle,  and  the  plate  set  to  dry,  as  shown  at  Fig.  69  ; 
when  well  drained,  remove  the  accumulation  of  fluid  very 
carefully  from  the  lower  edge  of  the  plate  by  a  piece  of 


THE    TANNIN    PROCESS.  83 

blotting-paper  drawn  along  it.  When  the  surface  is  dry, 
warm  gently  by  the  fire,  and  retain  for  use  in  a  grooved 
box.  As  plates  thus  coated  will  keep  good  any  length  of 
time,  any  required  number  may  be  prepared,  taking  care 
that  the  backs  of  them  are  quite  free  from  stains  of  gelatine. 

The  gelatinised  glass  is  now  coated  with  old  iodised 
collodion  in  the  usual  manner,  taking  particular  care  that 
the  whole  surface  of  the  plate  be  covered;  it  is  then  im- 
mersed in  the  silver-bath  employed  for  the  wet  collodion 
process  (page  34),  and  allowed  to  remain  in  it  from 
three  to  five  minutes. 

Remove  the  sensitive  plate  from  the  bath,  and  wash  it 
freely  under  a  water-tap  for  about  a  minute,  it  will  then 
be  ready  to  receive  the  preservative  solution,  composed 
as  follows : — 

Tannin 60  grains. 

Distilled  Water 4  ounces. 

Filter  through  paper,  and  measure  out  two  separate  por- 
tions according  to  the  size  of  the  plate  to  be  prepared, 
allowing  about  two  drachms  in  each  quantity  for  a  stereo- 
scopic plate.  The  first  portion  of  tannin  solution  is 
poured  over  the  washed  coating  of  the  sensitised  plate 
two  or  three  times,  so  as  to  remove  the  water  adherent  to 
it,  then  the  other  quantity  is  poured  on  and  off,  and  the 
plate  placed  on  end  on  a  piece  of  blotting-paper,  and 
allowed  to  dry  in  a  perfectly  dark  and  warm  place. 

After  exposure  in  the  camera,  which  averages  from 
one  to  three  minutes  on  a  favourable  day,  and  from  four 
to  eight  minutes  in  dull  weather,  the  picture  is  to  be 
developed,  for  which  purpose  the  following  solutions  are 
required : — 

No.  1.   (  pyro&allic   Acid 72  grains. 

I  Alcohol    1  ounce. 

Dissolve  and  keep  in  a  stoppered  bottle. 

C  Nitrate  of  Silver 20  grains. 

No.  2.  -j  Citric  Acid  20       „ 

C  Distilled  Water 1  ounce. 

Dissolve  and  filter  should  any  white  or  other  precipi- 
tate be  formed.  To  three  ounces  of  distilled  water  add 
half  a  drachm  of  No.  1,  and  if  the  plate  to  be  developed 


84:  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

be  a  stereoscopic  size,  take  three  drachms  of  this  solution 
and  add  to  it  from  ten  to  twenty  minims  of  No.  2 ;  this 
forms  the  developing  fluid. 

The  exposed  plate  is  first  moistened  with  distilled 
water,  which  must  he  done  quickly  and  evenly,  other- 
wise stains  are  produced,  and  then  the  developing  fluid 
poured  over  its  surface  and  kept  slightly  in  motion. 
The  development  must  be  carefully  watched,  and  if  in  a 
short  time  the  sky  comes  out  strongly,  but.  is  not  followed 
by  the  other  details  of  the  object,  the  plate  was  not  long 
enough  exposed,  and  the  developing  fluid  must  be  poured 
back  into  the  measure,  and  say  ten  minims  of  No.  1 
added,  so  as  to  increase  the  quantity  of  pyrogallic  acid. 
If  the  whole  of  the  picture,  however,  appears  to  come  out 
at  once,  a  few  drops  of  No.  2  is  to  be  added,  so  as  to  in- 
crease the  density  of  the  sky. 

When  the  picture  is  properly  developed,  it  is  fixed 
with  a  solution  of  hyposulphite  of  soda,  washed  and 
varnished  as  described  lor  the  wet  collodion  process. 


CHAPTER  XIII. 

POSITIVE    COLLODION    PROCESS. 

THE  positive  collodion  process  is  very  similar  in  its  gene- 
ral details  to  the  negative,  and  will  generally  be  found 
much  easier  of  manipulation,  from  its  not  requiring  the 
like  amount  of  accuracy. 

Preparation  of  the  Collodion. 

Iodide  of  Cadmium,  or  Ammonium 15  grains. 

Pyroxyline  15      „ 

Ether  3*  ounces. 

Alcohol 1£      ,, 

The  pyroxyline  and  the  iodide  of  cadmium  are  first  in- 
troduced into  a  dry  flask  or  bottle,  and  the  alcohol  poured 
upon  them,  and  the  mixture  shaken  violently  for  about 
a  minute ;  the  ether  is  then  added  and  the  contents  fur- 
ther agitated,  and  finally  set  aside  all  night.  The  clear 
supernatant  portion  may  now  be  carefully  poured  on  from 


POSITIVE    COLLODION    PROCESS.  85 

the  white  deposit  at  the  bottom  of  the  bottle,  or  instead 
of  decanting,  it  may  be  preferable  to  use  a  small  syphon 
bottle  as  shown  at  Fig.  23,  the  action  of  which  has 
already  been  explained. 

The  positive  collodion  thus  prepared  should,  like  the 
negative,  be  preserved  in  the  dark  in  well  corked  or  stop- 
pered bottles. 

Should  the  collodion  produce  a  fogged  image,  or  in 
other  words,  if  the  plate  becomes  covered  with  a  film  of 
reduced  silver,  underneath  which  there  is  obviously  a 
very  good  picture,  this  defect  may  be  remedied  by  adding 
to  it  a  few  drops  of  the  following  solution  : — 

Alcohol    85  ounces. 

Iodine  150  grains. 

A  small  quantity  of  this  liquid  is  added  to  the  collodion, 
so  as  to  impart  a  pale  amber  colour  thereto. 

Patent  glass  plates  are  not  required  for  direct  collodion 
positives,  and  the  reason  is  very  simple.  When  negatives 
are  taken  they  are  afterwards  applied  to  sheets  of  sensi- 
tised paper  with  some  degree  of  pressure,  in  order  to 
obtain  the  positive  impression,  on  which  account  it  is 
necessary  that  the  plate  should  be  perfectly  flat  and 
free  from  striae,  otherwise  the  striae  would  be  reproduced 
upon  the  paper,  and  the  glass  very  liable  to  fracture 
from  the  pressure.  Such  is  not  the  case,  however,  with 
direct  positives ;  here  the  purity  and  flatness  of  the 
glass  is  by  no  means  so  important,  and  ordinary  flatted 
crown  may  therefore  be  used.  Some  photographers  em- 
ploy glass  of  a  deep  red  or  purple  colour,  in  which  case 
it  is  unnecessary  to  varnish  the  plate. 

Whatever  kind  of  glass  plate  be  adopted,  it  should  be 
chosen  as  flat  as  possible,  otiierwise  there  will  be  difficulty 
in  getting  them  into  the  camera  back;  but  the  colour  in 
no  way  affects  the  beauty  of  the  image,  any  more  than 
bubbles  or  other  mechanical  surface  detects. 

It  has  been  previously  explained,  when  describing  the 
negative  collodion  process,  how  the  plate  is  cleaned,  and 
in  what  manner  the  collodion  is  poured  on  the  glass ;  no 
further  remarks  are  therefore  needed  on  the  subject  be- 
yond reminding  the  reader  that  the  collodion  should  be 
poured  upon  the  plate  in  the  dark  room,  in  order  to  be 


86  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

ready  as  soon  as  the  film  is  set  to  plunge  it  into  the  bath, 
which  is  composed  as  follows — 

Distilled  "Water 35  ounces, 

Fused  Nitrate  of  Silver 2i     „ 

Filter.     Prepare  also  the  following  solution — 

Water  3i  ounces. 

Acetate  of  Ammonia 30  grains. 

And,  after  filtration,  pour  it  into  the  bottle  which  contains 
the  above  solution  of  nitrate  of  silver.  A  crystalline  pre- 
cipitate is  produced  which  requires  several  days  to  deposit 
before  the  bath  will  be  ready  for  use.  It  may,  however, 
be  used  a  few  hours  after  mixing  by  resorting  to  filtration; 
but  it  is  always  better  after  a  few  days'  keeping. 

The  bottle  containing  the  bath  should  have  a  funnel 
and  filter  adapted  to  it,  through  which  the  solution  ought 
to  be  always  filtered  after  use,  so  as  to  be  ready  for  each 
day's  work,  the  same  filter  serving  almost  indefinitely. 

The  mixture  of  acetate  of  silver  with  the  nitrate  not 
only  produces  increased  rapidity,  but  tends  to  maintain  it. 
It  has,  moreover,  the  advantage  of  preventing  fogging ; 
but  to  this  end  it  is  necessary  to  be  always  kept  in  the 
dark. 

The  details  of  manipulation,  as  before  mentioned,  are 
the  same  as  have  been  described  for  the  negative  process, 
except  that  the  exposure  is  reduced  about  three -fourths 
and  the  development  effected  by  protosulphate  of  iron 
instead  of  pyrogallic  acid. 

A  saturated  solution  of  protosulphate  of  iron  is  pre- 
pared by  pouring  half  a  gallon  of  boiling  water  on  two 
pounds  of  green  vitriol,  or  ordinary  protosulphate  of  iron, 
stirring  well  together  ;  allow  it  to  cool  and  then  filter. 

This  saturated  solution  is,  of  course,  much  too  concen- 
trated for  use ;  the  developing  solution  is  therefore  pre- 
pared from  it  in  the  following  manner — 

Water  18   ounces. 

Saturated  Solution  of  Sulphate  of  Iron  8      ,, 

Ordinary  Acetic  Acid  of  Commerce   If     ,, 

Ordinary  Alcohol  1      „ 

Sulphuric  Acid 1      ,, 

This  solution  should  be  contained  in  a  vertical  bath  with 
a  dipper,  and  the  plate  immersed  therein  for  fifteen  seconds 


POSITIVE    COLLODION    PROCESS.  87 

after  exposure,  which  will  be   found  amply  sufficient  to 
develop  the  picture  in  all  cases. 

On  withdrawal  from  the  bath  the  image  ought  to  possess 
very  little  intensity,  if  otherwise  it  might  be  regarded  as 
an  indication  that  the  proof  would  not  be  a  satisfactory 
one.  However  this  may  be,  the  plate  is  now  well  washed 
with  water,  fixed  with  cyanide  of  potassium,  and  dried  as 
has  been  described  under  the  negative  process. 

It  is  only  after  fixing  that  a  correct  idea  can  be  formed 
as  to  whether  the  exposure  has  been  correct  or  not,  and 
practice  alone  will  enable  the  operator  to  determine  the 
point.  If  any  trace  of  fogging  should  become  apparent, 
a  few  drops  of  the  alcoholic  solution  of  iodine  may  be 
added  to  the  collodion,  the  formula  for  which  has  been 
already  given. 

It  may  not  be  out  of  place  here  to  give  a  few  explana- 
tory remarks  in  order  that  the  reader  may  fully  com- 
prehend the  essential  difference  between  a  positive  and 
negative  collodion  picture. 

A  negative  proof  being  intended  to  possess  varying 
degrees  of  opacity  to  transmitted  light,  it  is  necessary 
that  the  film  should  have  in  it  a  sufficient  quantity  of 
material  to  suffer  various  amounts  of  decomposition  in  the 
process  of  development ;  to  this  end,  not  only  is  a  thick 
collodion  employed,  but  also  one  fully  charged  with  iodide. 

With  a  positive  the  case  is  entirely  different,  the  film 
is  extremely  thin,  for  unless  it  were  so  the  whole  would 
be  patchy,  owing  to  the  light  having  penetrated  the  film 
and  effaced  the  delicate  details  by  reflection.  It  is, 
therefore,  of  the  highest  importance  to  use  the  thinnest 
possible  collodion,  which  yields,  on  leaving  the  bath,  a 
film  only  faintly  opalescent. 

For  fixing,  cyanide  of  potassium  is  a  more  appropriate 
agent  than  hyposulphite  of  soda,  as  it  yields  a  more 
agreeable  t'one.  It  requires,  however,  to  be  used  with 
great  care  on  account  of  its  highly  poisonous  character. 
The  removal  of  the  unaltered  iodide  by  its  means  may 
be  effected  either  by  immersion  or  by  pouring  the  solution 
over  the  plate.  The  fixing  solution  is  prepared  by  mixing 
together — 

Water  35  ounces. 

Cyanide  of  Potassium   li  to  3  ounces. 


88  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

Longer  contact  of  the  cyanide  than  is  absolutely  neces- 
sary should  be  avoided,  as  the  delicate  detail  is  apt  to 
suffer,  and  when  the  iodide  is  removed,  which  may  be 
ascertained  by  the  transparency  which  the  plate  acquires, 
it  should  be  freely  washed  with  water,  dried,  and  var- 
nished. 

The  varnish,  if  the  picture  be  taken  on  a  colourless 
glass,  must  be  black  on  the  plain  side,  and  colourless  or 
"  crystal  varnish  "  on  the  film  side  ;  when  purple  glass, 
however,  is  used,  the  black  varnish  may  be  dispensed 
with. 

A  solution  of  gum  arabic  is  sometimes  poured  over  the 
film  side  of  the  plate,  instead  of  varnish.  Some  operators 
omit  all  kind  of  protection;  this  is,  however,  a  mistake, 
as  pictures  which  are  not  covered  either  with  gum  arabic 
or  crystal  varnish,  very  quickly  assume  a  tarnished  and 
disagreeable  aspect. 

To  communicate  an  extra  amount  of  whiteness  to  direct 
positives  they  are  sometimes  treated  with  bichloride  of 
mercury  after  the  final  washing ;  the  general  tone,  how- 
ever, is  usually  sufficiently  cold,  and  therefore  its  employ- 
ment cannot  be  recommended  in  an  artistic  point  of  view. 

The  method  of  operating  is  as  follows  : — Cold  distilled 
water  is  allowed  to  take  up  as  much  bichloride  of  mer- 
cury as  it  will,  and,  the  solution  being  filtered,  the  positive 
is  immersed  therein  until  it  assumes  an  appearance  as  white 
as  snow,  which  will  be  in  about  one  minute,  after  which  it 
is  washed  and  varnished  in  the  usual  way.  These  proofs 
should  be  preserved  from  the  direct  action  of  the  sun's 
rays,  otherwise  they  become  very  much  weakened  in  a 
few  months. 

The  different  methods  of  mounting  in  passe-partouts, 
(fee.,  involve  operations  of  so  strictly  mechanical  a  nature 
that  they  need  not  be  entered  into  in  this  place,  as  the 
means  of  carrying  them  out  are  soon  acquired  by  practice. 

Glass  positives  are  very  easy  to  take,  although  some 
practice  is  necessary  to  attain  to  any  great  degree  of 
excellence.  The  pictures  should  have  a  mirror-like 
aspect,  and  the  blacks  extremely  pure.  Sometimes  a 
certain  amount  of  fogging  takes  place,  marring  the  bril- 
liancy of  the  picture;  this  may  be  removed  by  washing 
the  picture  while  still  wet,  immediately  after  fixing,  with 


THE    STEREOSCOPE.  89 

an  alcoholic  solution  of  iodine  of  15  grains  to  the  ounce. 
The  length  of  time  must  be  determined  by  the  extent 
of  the  fogging,  and  can  only  be  ascertained  by  practice. 
When  it  is  considered  that  the  action  of  the  iodine  has 
been  sufficiently  prolonged,  it  is  washed  off,  and  the  plate 
again  immersed  in  the  cyanide  fixing  bath,  and  finally 
washed  and  dried. 


CHAPTER  XIV. 

THE      STEREOSCOPE. 

THIS  instrument  shows  in  relief,  as  one  picture,  two  dis- 
similar views  of  the  same  object,  mounted  together  either 
on  plate  or  paper.  The  following  is  an  explanation  of 
this  singular  phenomenon.  If,  for  example,  a  square- 
based  pyramid  be  examined  with  the  left  eye,  the  eye 
being  placed  in  the  axis  of  this  pyramid,  it  is  very 
evident  that  it  will  present  the  appearance  of  a  square 
intersected  by  its  two  diagonals,  and  a  drawing  of  it 
would,  in  fact,  be  represented  by  such  a  figure.  But  if 
the  left  eye  be  now  closed,  and  the  right  eye  opened,  it  is 
equally  clear  that  one  side  of  the  pyramid  will  be  more 
visible  than  the  other,  and  that  in  proportion  to  its 
height. 

Now,  if  this  same  pyramid  be  viewed  with  both  eyes 
at  the  same  time,  the  two  different  images  combine  upon 
the  retina  in  such  a  way  as  to  produce  the  appearance  of 
a  single  solid  pyramid,  in  perfect  relief,  or,  in  other  words, 
the  effect  is  stereoscopic. 

If  the  pyramid,  instead  of  being  in  relief,  were  hollow, 
and  the  left  eye,  as  before,  placed  on  a  line  with  its  axis, 
a  square  figure  intersected  by  its  two  diagonals  will  be 
seen;  but  immediately  upon  opening  the  right  eye,  the 
effect  will  be  exactly  the  reverse  of  what  occurred  in  the 
case  of  the  figure  in  relief.  In  the  former  case,  it  was 
the  side  of  the  pyramid  to  the  right  which  impinged 
mostly  on  the  right  eye,  but  in  the  case  of  the  hollow 


90 


PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 


figure,  it  would  be,  on  the  contrary,  the  left  eye  which 
receives  the  larger  impression,  and  in  consequence  thereof, 
the  effect  upon  the  two  eyes  would  be  different,  and 
instead  of  producing  the  sensation  of  solidity  or  relief, 
the  combined  images  produce  the  appearance  of  tollow- 
ness,  or  in  other  words,  are  pseudoscopic. 

It  is  upon  this  principle  that  the  stereoscope  is  founded, 
the  two  views  employed  together  are  each  taken  by  a 
camera,  as  near  as  possible  under  the  same  conditions  as 
naturally  presented  to  each  eye.  The  prismatic  glasses 
of  the  instrument  superpose  the  two  views  in  such  away 
that  but  one  image  is  percieved  by  the  two  eyes,  and 
that  in  relief. 

To  Professor  Wheatstone  is  due  the  credit  for  the 
elaboration  of  this  theory  and  the  application  of  photo- 
graphy thereto  ;  also  the  invention  of  one  modification  of 
the  instrument.  Mirrors  were  employed  in  its  construc- 
tion, and  it  is  known  as  the  reflecting  stereoscope.  Sir 
David  Brewster  replaced  the  mirrors  by  prisms,  and  it  is 
this  improvement  which  has  rendered  it  so  popular  and 
portable. 

The  relief  of  near  objects  is  easily  explained,  by  the 

large  angle  formed  by  the 
visual  rays  brought  to 
each  eye ;  but  as  this  angle 
becomes  more  and  more 
diminished  in  proportion 
to  the  distance  of  the  ob- 
jects, it  becomes  at  last 
very  difficult  to  appreciate 
relief,  and  inconsequence, 
the  situation  of  large 
masses  can  only  be  judged  . 
of  by  comparison  with 
those  which  are  near. 

The    original     stereo- 
scope   was    composed    of 
small  half   lenses,    which 
Fig.  75.  Prismatic  stereoscope.         turned  in   brass  tubes  in 
such  a  way  as  completely  to  superpose  the  two  views  ;  but 
now  the  small  lenses  are  replaced  by  large  square  prisms, 
let  into  the  upper  portion  of  the  stereoscope,  and  this  not 


THE    STEREOSCOPE.  91 

only  affords  a  larger  field  of  view,  but  also  makes  the 
instrument  more  easy  to  manage. 

Fig.  75  represents  a  prismatic  stereoscope.  The  slides  to 
be  viewed  are  introduced  through  a  groove  at  the  bottom  ; 
it  is  furnished  with  a  centre  partition,  which  assists  in  the 
superposition  of  the  two  images.  The  upper  portion  is 
shown  detached,  or  open,  the  better  to  exhibit  its  general 
construction. 

For  the  best  instruments  the  two  prisms  are  achromatic, 
or  else  replaced  by  two  achromatic  lenses,  by  which  their 
definition  is  rendered  as  perfect  as  possible.  A  very  con- 
venient form  of  stereoscope  for  showing  a  number  of 
slides  is  now  constructed,  whereby  as  many  as  fifty  pic- 
tures can  be  viewed  consecutively,  by  merely  turning  a 
small  button.  This  arrangement  consists  of  a  stereoscope 
fixed  at  the  top  of  a  deep  box  containing  the  views, 
which  are  attached  to  a  kind  of  endless  chain,  on  moving 
which  the  pictures  are  presented  as  required. 

There  are  many  other  forms  of  stereoscope,  the  whole 
of  which,  however,  with  the  exception,  perhaps,  of  the 
reflecting  stereoscope  for  viewing  large  pictures,  being 
constructed  on  the  general  principle  and  arrangements  of 
the  foregoing,  any  further  description  would  be  un- 
necessary. 

Stereoscopic  views  are  always  of   small  size,  except 


Fig.  76.  Twin-lens  Camera  with  Double  Back.  Fig.  77. 

those  before  mentioned  for  the  reflecting  stereoscope,  and 
are  taken  on  glass  and  paper  ;  those  on  glass  are  viewed 
as  transparencies,  but  the  paper  slides  are  examined  by 
reflected  light,  for  which  purpose  there  is  usually  attached 


92  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

to  the  stereoscope  some  such  contrivance  as  is  represented 
at  Fig.  75,  like  a  small  door  in  front. 

The  most  simple  method  of  obtaining  stereoscopic 
pictures  certainly  consists  in  taking  the  two  proofs  at  the 
same  time,  with  the  apparatus  as  represented  in  Fig.  76. 
It  is  composed,  1st,  of  two  double  achromatic  combinations 
of  exactly  the  same  focal  length  ;  2nd,  of  an  ordinary 
expanding  camera,  furnished,  however,  with  a  back,  having 
two  shutters  (Fig.  77). 

The  following  is  the  method  of  operating  : — 

Whenever  the  two  lenses  are  not  exactly  to  the  same 
focus,  it  is  necessary  to  begin  by  focussing  a  near  object, 
such,  for  instance,  as  a  plaster  bust.  When  a  perfectly 
sharp  image  is  obtained  upon  the  ground  glass  with  each 
of  the  lenses,  the  rack  and  pinion  adjustment  must  not 
be  again  touched,  but  the  focussing  of  any  subsequent 
figure  must  be  accomplished  by  drawing  in  or  out  the 
expanding  or  inner  body  of  the  camera. 

This,  however,  will  not  suffice,  if  the  distance  of  the 
bust  from  the  camera  has  not  been  so  regulated  as  to  be 
that  which  will  be  most  suitable  for  a  portrait.  For  this 
apparatus  will  serve  only  for  portraits,  and  that,  too,  for 
portraits  taken  at  a  very  short  distance ;  otherwise,  the 
proofs  will  be  wanting  in  relief. 

As  would  be  inferred  from  the  shape  of  the  back,  a 
glass  is  chosen  much  longer  than  it  is  wide,  upon  which 
the  two  negatives  are  taken  at  the  same  time.  The 
prints  obtained  from  these  negatives  are  reversed,  that  is 
to  say,  when  each  positive  is  cut  for  the  purpose  of  being 
mounted  upon  card,  it  will  be  necessary  to  paste  the  left- 
hand  picture  on  the  right  side  of  the  card,  and  the  right- 
hand  print  on  the  left  of  the  card. 

When,  with  this  apparatus,  it  is  desired  to  take  views, 
a  diaphragm  or  stop  must  be  inserted  between  the  two 
lenses,  but  the  two  proofs  can,  however,  no  longer  be 
taken  at  the  same  time,  for  the  distance  between  the  two 
lenses  is  not  sufficient  to  give  the  proper  amount  of 
stereoscopic  relief  for  distant  objects. 

A  board  with  moveable  guides  is  therefore  placed  upon 
the  camera-stand,  as  represented  at  Fig.  81,  and  two 
cross  lines  are  drawn  upon  the  ground  glass  of  the 
camera.  One  marks  the  centre  on  one  side  ;  the  second, 


THE    STEREOSCOPE.  93 

that  on  the  other.  The  camera  is  then  pointed  in  such  a 
way  that  the  same  object  in  the  landscape  comes  on 
the  centre  of  the  cross  lines,  for  without  this  the  proof 
would  not  be  properly  centred. 

The  two  negatives  then  are  taken  separately,  and 
require  transposing  when  they  are  mounted  on  the  card. 
But  this  reversing  or  transposition  may  be,  however, 
accomplished  in  the  instrument  itself,  so  effectively,  that 
when  the  negative  is  placed  in  the  stereoscope,  the 
objects  appear  in  relief. 

For  this  purpose,  suppose  the  apparatus,  Fig.  76,  is  in 
the  position  as  represented  in  Fig.  81.  Instead  of  taking 
with  the  right-hand  lens  the  right-hand  negative,  and 
with  the  left-hand  lens  the  left-hand  negative,  let  the  ope- 
rations be  reversed.  Take  the  left  picture  with  the  right 
lens,  and  vice  versd — the  right  picture  with  the  left  lens. 

When  it  is  desired  to  take  landscapes  only,  the  camera 
represented  in  Fig.  78  is  generally  used.  It  is  an  ordinary 
quarter-plate  camera,  which  is  converted  into  a  stereo- 
scopic camera  by  the  addition  of  three  pieces  of  apparatus, 
two  of  which  are  represented  in  Figs.  79  and  80. 

In  Fig.  79  will  be  seen  a  grooved  piece  of  wood,  with 
two  rebates  and  a  catch  in  the  middle  of  the  upper  one, 
and  a  ground  glass  sliding  between  them  ;  this  is  stopped 
in  the  middle  by  the  catch  before  mentioned.  This 
piece  of  wood  is  screwed  to  an  ordinary  camera-back, 
the  door  of  which  is  reversed. 

Two  diagonal  lines  are  drawn  upon  the  ground  glass. 
When  it  is  desired  to  take  a  stereoscopic  view,  the  board 
with  two  moveable  rebates, 
as  represented  in  Fig.  81,  is 
brought  into  use. 

The  following  is  the  method 
of  proceeding.     The  camera, 
Fig.  78,  is  first  placed  in  one 
of  its  positions,  and  directed 
towards    the    view — then   in 
the     second      position,     and 
directed    towards   the    same 
point.    These  two  views  will     **' 78'  ^Tfew"  &tereuscopic 
appear  upon   the  ground  glass    exactly   the    same,  but 
they  are  not  so  in  reality. 


94:  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

The  ground  glass  being  withdrawn,  the  camera  is  placed 
on  the  right  hand  of  the  operator,  who  looks  at  the  view 
which  is-  before  him.  Replacing  the  focussing  glass  by 
the  camera-back,  which  is  introduced  on  the  right  side 
of  the  piece  of  wood  (Fig.  79),  it  is  obvious  that  it  is 


Fig.  79.  Frame  with  Ground  Glass.  Fig.  80.  Frame  for  Sensitive  Plate. 

that  part  of  the  glass  which  is  on  the  left  in  the  back 
which  will  be  first  uncovered,  as  is  shown  in  Fig.  80.  The 
slide  being  drawn,  and  the  time  of  exposure  having 
expired,  the  door  is  closed.  Fig.  78  shows  the  position 
of  the  camera  for  the  first  picture,  that  is  to  say,  the  right- 
hand  one. 

In  the  second  position,  that  of  the  left,  the  camera- 
back  is  made  to  slide  between  the  two  rebates  until  it  is 
checked  by  the  brass  catch;  the  second  picture  is  then 
taken. 

These  directions  seem  complicated,  but  in  practice  they 
prove  very  simple.  The  principle  being  once  understood, 
it  is  easy  to  follow  the  description. 

There  remains  a  third  method  of  operating,  which 
is  still  more  difficult.  When  it  is  desired  to  take  views 
of  animated  objects  or  groups,  the  necessary  interval 
which  elapses  between  the  two  positions  of  the  camera, 
just  described,  renders  it  inapplicable  for  the  purpose, 
as  in  all  probability  the  objects  must  have  moved,  and 
the  two  views  would  not  be  alike.  Under  these  cir- 
cumstances two  quarter-plate  cameras  are  used,  furnished 
with  lenses  whose  focal  lengths  are  exactly  equal,  and 
the  operation  is  conducted  as  is  shown  in  Fig.  81.  Great 
care  must  be  taken  to  open  and  close  the  two  shutters  at 
the  same  time,  or  at  least  very  quickly  one  after  the 
other,  as  it  is  obvious  that  if  one  plate  be  longer  exposed 


THE    STEREOSCOPE.  95 

than  the  other,  the  development  must   take  place  un- 
equally, and  the  two  proofs  will  be  unequal  also. 


Fig.  81.  Position  of  the  two  Cameras  for  Instantaneous  Views. 

In  order  that  the  two  negatives  should  be  exactly 
alike,  the  two  plates  should  be  collodionised  at  the 
same  time,  and  immersed  one  after  the  other  in  the  same 
nitrate -bath,  from  which  they  should  be  simultaneously 
withdrawn. 

In  reference  to  the  development,  a  dish  is  used  with 
a  glass  bottom  and  wooden  sides,  or  of  solid  glass, 
and  the  two  plates  are  placed  therein,  one  by  the  side  of 
the  other,  in  order  that  both  may  be  developed  with 
the  same  pyrogallic  acid.  This  is  the  only  way  to 
obtain  proofs  of  nearly  equal  intensity,  for  it  is,  indeed, 
quite  a  chance  that  they  should  be  exactly  alike ;  a 
little  difference  will  not,  however,  materially  affect  the 
result  in  printing. 

Positive  proofs  should  be  reversed:  the  one  which  was 
taken  on  the  right  should  be  on  the  left  in  the  card,  and 
in  order  that  this  may  always  be  done  correctly,  it  is 
advisable  to  mark  each  of  the  negatives  when  taken 
separately. 

The  apparatus  for  cartes  de  visite,  at  page  39,  is,  in 
fact,  nothing  more  than  the  apparatus,  Fig.  76,  with 
a  back  like  Fig.  80.  It  consists  of  a  camera  to  which 
four  lenses  of  equal  focal  length  have  been  adapted, 
furnished  with  a  sliding  back.  From  this  arrangement 
it  follows  that  when  the  lenses  are  arranged  as  shown  in 
Fig.  76,  there  will  be  eight  negatives  taken  on  each  plate, 
and  that  each  pair  will  be  stereoscopic.  The  cost  of  the 
apparatus  may,  however,  be  materially  lessened  by  using 
a  whole-plate  camera  fitted  with  a  pair  of  twin-lenses, 


96  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

as  in  Fig.  76,  and  arranged  so  as  to  slide  together  on  its 
rising  front ;  in  this  way  four  carte  de  visite  pictures  may 
be  obtained  on  one  plate.  A  number  of  negatives  are 
taken  on  one  plate,  because  the  printing  of  an  equal 
number  of  proofs  separately  would  be  much  more  costly 
and  troublesome. 

It  remains  to  consider  the  proper  angular  distance 
which  should  separate  the  two  cameras  represented  in 
Fig.  81,  so  as  to  produce  the  desired  result. 

If  several  square-based  pyramids,  of  various  heights, 
be  placed  successively  on  the  same  spot,  and  examined 
with  one  eye  from  a  fixed  point  over  and  slightly  to  the 
side  of  the  pyramids,  it  will  be  perceived  that  each  time 
a  pyramid  is  changed,  that  the  relative  position  of  the 
apex  alters,  and  that  this  displacement  is  greater  the 
taller  the  pyramid  viewed,  or  in  other  words,  the  relief 
is  more  visible.  If  these  pyramids  be  now  viewed  again 
with  one  eye,  but  this  time  not  on  one  side,  but  directly 
on  a  line  with  their  axes,  they  will,  although  all  differ- 
ing in  height,  nevertheless  present  the  same  appearance 
of  a  square  cut  with  its  diagonals. 

Thus,  each  time  that  the  height  of  the  pyramid  varies, 
the  visual  angle  becomes  greater,  and  the  relief  is  con- 
sequently more  striking. 

But  suppose  for  a  moment  that  it  is  desired  to  repro- 
duce the  pyramid,  what  angle  should  be  employed? 
should  it  be  the  angle  of  vision,  or  a  larger  one  ? 

In  view  of  what  has  been  said  above,  it  is  evident 
that  if  a  larger  angle  be  used,  the  pyramid  will  appear 
in  the  stereoscope  higher  than  it  really  is,  and  as  the 
photographic  apparatus  does  not  furnish  any  standard 
of  comparison  by  means  of  an  object  of  known  height 
placed  side  by  side,  a  false  idea  will  be  conveyed  of 
the  true  size  of  the  pyramid. 

When  the  angle  is  too  great,  the  object  is  distorted. 
This  defect  is,  so  to  speak,  very  general  in  all  repro- 
ductions of  statues,  portraits,  &c.  The  relief  in  these 
cases  is,  with  very  few  exceptions,  greatly  exaggerated. 
And  thus  it  happens  that  when  a  statue  is  reproduced  in 
this  way,  the-  head  often  seems  so  much  in  advance,  that 
it  becomes  really  monstrous. 

It  should  always  be  borne  in  mind  when  objects  are  to 


THE    STEREOSCOPE.  97 

be  reproduced  which  are  of  known  size  and  proportions, 
such  as  statues,  portraits,  animals,  &c.,  that  if  a  large 
angle  be  employed  the  image  will  be  distorted. 

For  views  and  landscapes  an  excessive  relief  may  be 
obtained  without  detriment  to  the  picture,  on  the  con- 
trary, with  a  decided  improvement  in  effect,  at  the  same 
time  attention  must  be  had  to  the  character  of  the  view. 
If,  for  example,  the  foreground  of  the  picture  be  very 
near  the  operator,  a  small  angle  (about  2°)  must  be  used, 
otherwise  the  two  pictures  will  not  become  superposed  in 
the  stereoscope.  If,  on  the  contrary,  the  view  offers  but 
little  difference  between  the  various  planes,  advantage  may 
be  taken  of  this,  and  a  larger  angle,  -±°  for  example,  may 
be  employed. 

The  stereoscopic  angle  is  reckoned  from  the  nearest 
point  of  the  view  to  be  taken;  this  point  forming  the 
apex  of  the  triangle,  and  the  distance  between  the  two 
cameras  being  the  base,  or  rather  the  arc,  of  the  angle. 

When  the  operator  has  chosen  his  point  of  sight,  the 
eye  should  estimate  the  difference  between  the  cameras 
and  the  nearest  point  in  the  view  to  be  taken,  which  will 
determine  whether  an  angle  of  2°  or  4°  be  preferable. 
The  following  table  will,  to  a  certain  extent,  serve  as  a 
guide  for  beginners  to  judge  the  value  of  an  angle,  that 
of  2°  being  selected  as  an  example : — 

Distance  of  the  Object  from  the  Cameras.  Distance  between  the  Cameras. 

Yards.  Inches. 

1 1-26 

2 2-52 

3 3'78 

4 5-04 

5 6-30 

6 7'56 

7 8-82 

8 10-08 

9* 31-34 

10 12-60 

15 18-90 

20 25-20 

25 31-68 

30 37'80 

35 44-28 

40  ...  50-40 


98  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

CHAPTER   XV. 

PRINTING    POSITIVE    PROOFS. 

THEORETICALLY,  the  printing  process  is  one  of  the  greatest 
simplicity  : — One  side  of  a  sheet  of  paper  is  first  imhued 
with  a  solution  of  common  salt,  and  dried ;  it  is  then 
treated  with  a  solution  of  nitrate  of  silver.  A  white 
substance,  called  chloride  of  silver,  is  formed  in  the  texture 
of  the  paper,  which  has  the  singular  property  of  becoming 
rapidly  darkened  on  exposure  to  the  sun  ;  it  is  on  this 
account  that  when  it  is  prepared  the  operation  should  be 
performed  in  the  absence  of  daylight,  and  the  sensitive 
paper  preserved  in  a  dark  box. 

It  is  evident  that  if  paper  so  prepared  be  placed  behind 
a  negative,  and  exposed  to  daylight,  a  positive  image  will 
be  produced  on  the  paper.  And,  in  order  to  its  preserva- 
tion, it  will  be  necessary  to  remove  the  whole  of  the  chloride 
of  silver  unacted  on  by  light,  without  affecting  those  por- 
tions which  constitute  the  image ;  this  is  readily  accom- 
plished by  soaking  the  proof  for  a  quarter  of  an  hour  in  a 
solution  of  hyposulphite  of  soda,  and  then  washing  most 
copiously  in  water  to  remove  every  trace  of  this  fixing 
agent  from  the  texture  of  the  paper. 

The  proof  thus  completed  is  the  final  result  of  all  the 
operations  which  have  been  previously  described. 

The  foregoing  description  gives  the  general  principles 
of  the  printing  process ;  a  successful  result,  however,  can 
only  be  attained  by  the  exercise  of  the  greatest  care  and 
attention  to  many  important  details,  which  will  be  treated 
of  under  the  following  heads  : — 

1.  Salting  the  paper,  that  is,  treating  the  paper  with  a 

solution  of  common  salt,  or  chloride  of  ammonium. 

2.  Sensitising  the  paper,  by  floating  on  a.  solution  of 

nitrate  of  silver. 

3.  Exposing    the  prepared  paper   to   light,  and    the 

apparatus  used  for  this  purpose. 

4.  Fixing  the  image  formed  bv  lioht,  and  imparting 

an  agreeable  tone. 

5.  Mounting  the  proofs,  that  is  to  say,  giving  the  final 

touches  before  delivering  them  to  the  public. 


SALTING    THE    PAPER.  99 

1.  Salting  the  Paper. 

Suitable  paper  for  positive  proofs  is  now  manufactured 
expressly  for  the  purpose,  and  can  readily  be  obtained 
both  in  England  and  on  the  continent.  It  is  not,  how- 
ever, every  sheet  in  the  ream  as  obtained  from  the  manu- 
facturers that  ought  to  be  employed.  Those  that  are 
uneven  in  texture,  and  blemished  with  black  and  other 
spots,  must  be  rejected. 

While  selecting  paper  it  is  important  to  touch  only  the 
edges  of  the  sheets,  because,  however  dry  the  fingers  may 
be,  they  always  leave  a  slight  imprint  which,  sooner  or 
later,  will  produce  a  stain. 

It  is  also  necessary  to  ascertain  the  right  side  of  the 
paper  to  which  the  chemicals  should  be  applied;  this 
may  be  done  by  examining  the  paper  by  reflected  light, 
and  is  that  side  most  uniform  in  its  character  and  freest 
from  lines.  Each  sheet,  as  selected,  should  have  the 
wrong  side  distinguished  by  a  pencil  mark. 

Positive  paper  should  be  moderately  thick.  A  ream 
should  weigh  about  22  Ibs.,  the  size  being  22  inches  by 
17  inches;  but,  generally  speaking,  for  albumenised  paper, 
the  ream  should  not  weigh  less  than  24  Ibs.,  especially  if 
it  be  required  highly  glazed ;  while  for  ordinary  salted 
paper  a  weight  of  18  Ibs.  to  the  ream  will  be  found  suf- 
ficient. The  paper  may  be  salted  with  various  chlorides, 
such  as  the  chlorides  of  barium,  strontium,  potassium, 
ammonium,  &c. ;  and  although  it  was  once  thought  that 
each  salt  imparted  a  characteristic  tint  to  the  proof,  a 
contrary  opinion  is  now  entertained  ;  however,  chloride  of 
sodium,  or  common  salt,  which  is  always  to  be  obtained 
in  a  fair  state  of  purity,  is  now  generally  used. 

The  salt  is  dissolved  in  distilled,  or  rain-water,  in  the 
proportion  of  12  grains  to  the  ounce,  and  the  solution  fil- 
tered into  a  dish  large  enough  to  hold  a  whole  sheet  of 
paper,  and  measuring,  therefore,  about  24:  inches  by 
19  inches.  The  preparation  of  whole  sheets  of  paper  at 
one  time  will  generally  be  found  most  advantageous,  and 
they  are  afterwards  easily  cut  to  any  smaller  sizes  that 
may  be  required. 

The  paper  is  spread  out  or  floated  on  this  solution  in 
the  following  manner  : — The  opposite  ends  of  the  sheet 
F  2 


100 


PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 


are  held,  and  the  paper  bent  as  represented  in  Fig.  82, 
and  the  middle  of  the  paper  being  brought  into  contact 
with  the  liquid,  the  two  ends  are  regularly  lowered  until 
the  whole  of  one  side  just  floats  on  the  surface.  The  side 
of  the  paper  previously  marked  with  a  pencil  should  be 
uppermost. 

The  paper  ought  to  remain  on  this  bath  five  minutes  in 
winter  and  three  minutes  in  summer,  at  the  end  of  which 


Fig.  82.  Salting  the  Paper. 

time  it  is  withdrawn  by  means  of  a  pair  of  horn  or  box- 
wood forceps  and  held  for  a  little  while  over  the  dish,  to 
drain ;  it  is  then  attached  to  two  clips,  or  other  means 
of  suspension,  and  hung  on  a  line  to  dry  (Fig.  84). 

If  the  operator,  or  rather  amateur,  should  not  be  often 
performing  this  operation  it  may  be  found  more  conve- 
nient to  use  smaller  sheets,  and  to  suspend  them  in  the 
manner  indicated  in  Fig.  83;  whichever  method  of  sus- 
pension, however,  is  adopted,  a  small  piece  of  white 
bibulous  paper  should  be  attached  to  the  lower  corner  or 
corners,  in  order  to  aid  the  draining. of  the  salt  solution. 

Paper  thus  salted  is  preserved  in  a  portfolio,  and,  as  it 
does  not  undergo  any  alteration  by  keeping,  it  may  be 
prepared  in  large  quantities  at  a  time. 

Albumenised    paper  yields   positive  proofs   of  great 


SALTING    THE    TAPER. 


101 


delicacy  and  fine  colour.     It  is,  however,  a  little  more 
difficult  to  prepare. 

White  of  egg  is  heaten  into  a  snow-white  froth,  add- 
ing, for  each  10  eggs,  150  grains  of  salt,  reduced  to  fine 


Harginj  the  Paper  to  Dry. 


Fig.  84. 


powder  ;  then,  when  the  albumen  has  accumulated  by 
being  allowed  to  remain  at  rest  (see  Fig.  74,  and  pages  75, 
76),  it  is  poured  into  a  large  flat  porcelain  tray,  and  used 
,  in  the  same  manner  as  the  ordinary  salting-bath,  except 
that  the  viscous  nature  of  the  albumen  requires  greater 
care  in  floating. 

It  is  very  difficult  to  albumenise  large  sheets  of  paper. 
The  first  operation  should  be  the  removal  of  bubbles  by 
means  of  a  card,  and  this  must  be  done  very  effectually, 
because  wherever  there  is  a  bubble  the  liquid  does  not 
touch  the  paper,  and  the  consequence  is  a  white  spot  in 
the  print. 

It  is  advisable  to  keep  the  paper  which  it  is  intended 
to  albumenise  in  a  clamp  place  for  a  few  days  before 
using,  otherwise  it  gets  into  folds  on  the  liquid,  and 
bubbles  are  sure  to  form.  When,  however,  the  paper  is 
damp  it  spreads  with  the  greatest  facility  on  the  albumen- 


102 


PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 


bath,  and  no  fear  need  be  entertained  as  to  the  formation 
of  the  fatal  bubbles.  These  precautions  are  specially 
applicable  to  large  sheets,  the  small  ones  being  compara- 
tively easy  of  manipulation. 

The  large  sheets  are  very  difficult  to  suspend.     An 
excellent  plan  is  to  attach  the  sheets,  on  being  withdrawn 


Fig.  85.  Drying  of  Large  Sheet?. 

from  the  bath,  to  frames  of  cardboard  by  the  aid  of  pins, 
as  shown  in  Fig.  85.  In  this  way  the  tearing  of  the 
sheet,  and  its  frequent  falling  to  the  ground,  is  avoided. 

There  is  not  much  purely  albumenised  paper  used  ; 
that  which  has  been  prepared  with  a  mixture  of  albumen 
and  water  being  preferred,  on  account  of  the  more 
moderate  brilliancy  given  to  the  sheets.  From  10  to  40 
per  cent,  of  water  may  be  added  to  the  pure  albumen; 
but  the  more  water,  the  less  brilliant  the  paper. 

For  portraiture  a  paper  prepared  with  pure  albumen 


SENSITISING    THE    PAPER.  103 

should  not  be  used,  on  account  of  its  excessive  brilliancy  ; 
but  rather  plain  salted  paper,  or  paper  prepared  by  float- 
ing on  a  mixture  of  equal  volumes  of  albumen  and 
water  containing  4  per  cent,  of  salt.  Albumenised  paper 
should  be  preserved  in  tin  or  zinc  boxes,  closed  from  con- 
tact with  a  damp  atmosphere,  for  if  it  absorbs  moisture 
it  becomes  rapidly  changed,  especially  in  summer  time. 
Whether  the  amateur  prepares  his  own  paper,  or  whether 
he  buys  it,  there  are  always  some  bad  sheets.  Sometimes 
there  are  great  lines  arising  from  the  draining  of  the 
albumen  towards  one  point,  sometimes  the  gloss  is  greater 
at  one  place  than  another,  without  the  reason  being  very 
obvious. 

2.  Sensitising  the  Paper. 

This  operation  should  be  performed  in  the  dark,  or  at 
all  events  in  a  moderate  light.  Daylight  does  not  act  by 
any  means  so  energetically  on  positive  paper  as  on  collo- 
dion; nevertheless,  it  is  advisable  to  have  a  room  specially 
arranged  for  the  purpose. 

To  this  end  the  windows  should  be  furnished  with 
yellow  blinds  or  frames,  which  will  admit  a  large  body 
of  light,  having  no  action  on  the  prepared  paper. 

Paper  is  sensitised  by  floating  it  for  three  or  four 
minutes  on  a  silver-bath  of  20  per  cent. 

.  Water 20  ounces. 

Kecrystallised  Nitrate  of  Silver 4      ,, 

This  solution  is  poured  into  a  perfectly  clean  dish,  and 
the  paper  floated  thereon,  in  the  manner  shown  at  Fig.  82. 

If  the  proportion  of  nitrate  of  silver  be  much  reduced 
the  proofs  will  be  wanting  in  vigour ;  from  which  circum- 
stance, as  often  as  100  sheets  of  paper,  9  inches  by  7, 
have  been  sensitised,  half  an  ounce  of  nitrate  of  silver 
should  be  added  to  the  bath. 

In  order  to  avoid  soiling  the  fingers,  and  also  the  stains 
which  would  be  produced  by  the  contact  of  the  clips,  it 
is  best  to  turn  up  a  corner  of  the  sheet  (Fig.  86),  which 
prevents  its  absorbing  any  of  the  nitrate  of  silver,  and 
may,  therefore,  be  taken  hold  of  for  hanging  up  the  sheet. 
Instead  of  hanging  the  sheets  of  paper  by  hooks  (Fig. 
87),  they  can  be  more  conveniently  suspended  by  some 


104:  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

little  articles,  supplied  with  india-rubber  springs,  known  as 
American  Clips  (Fig.  88). 

It  is  only  necessary  to  press  on  the  ends  of  these  clips  in 
order  to  open  them,  and  to  withdraw  the  pressure  after 


Fig.  87. 

inserting  the  paper,  which  is  then  held  with  the  greatest 
tenacity.  Figs.  83  and  84:  show  how  these  improved  clips 
are  used. 

Small  pieces  of  white  blotting-paper  should  be  attached 
to  the  corners  of  the  sheet  from  which  the 
solution  is  draining,  and  the  drops  of  nitrate  of 
silver  may  be  collected  in  test-glasses  (Figs. 
83  and  84),  although  the  drops  so  collected 
serve  only  for  transformation  into  chloride  of 
silver. 

The    dry  sensitised  sheets    shoul  d  be    used 
within  a  day  or  two  after  preparation,  unless  pre- 
served  in  a  box  with  chloride  of  calcium,  to  be 
presently  described. 

The  silver-bath  may,  of  course,  be  used  until  it  is 
exhausted,  remembering  always  to  add  the  half  ounce  of 
nitrate  of  silver  for  every  100  sheets  9  inches  by  7,  as 
before  mentioned.  It  must,  however,  be  filtered  every 
time  it  is  desired  to  sensitise  a  fresh  batch  of  paper. 

A  special  bath  should  be  used  for  albumenised  paper, 
to  which  should  be  added  one -fortieth  of  its  weight  of 
kaolin,  which  should  always  be  kept  at  the  bottom  of  the 
bottle,  shaking  it  up  from  time  to  time,  and  regularly 
allowing  it  to  settle.  This  kaolin  maintains  the  bath  in  a 
colourless  condition,  for  without  it  the  solution  would 
acquire  a  deep  yellow  colour  which  would  be  communi- 
cated to  the  proofs. 

When  a  number  of  sheets  have  been  sensitised,  they 


SENSITISING    THE    PAPER. 


105 


are  placed  in  portfolios,  one  on  the  other,  handling  them 
only  by  the  edges,  in  order  to  avoid  contact  of  the  fingers, 
which  produces  stains.  They  should  be  used  within  three 
days. 


Fig.  89.  Apparatus  for  preserving  Sensitised  Paper?. 

If  it  be  desired  to  preserve  sensitised  paper  for  some 
months,  an  apparatus  must  be  employed  consisting  of  a 
box  with  an  air-tight  cover,  and  containing  some  dried 
chloride  of  calcium.  Figs.  89  and  90  represent  two  forms 
of  the  apparatus.  Fig.  89  consists  of  a  square  zinc  or  tin 
box,  about  six  inches  deep,  furnished  with 
a  false  bottom,  on  the  top  of  which  is 
placed  the  sensitised  paper,  and  under- 
neath a  metal  or  porcelain  basin  filled  with 
pieces  of  dried  chloride  of  calcium)  the 
whole  is  closed  by  a  well-fitting  lid,  which 
can  be  rendered  air-tight  by  pasting  a 
strip  of  paper  around  the  joining. 

The  other  form,  Fig.  90,  is  a  very  con- 
venient, one  for   travelling.       The  outer 
cylinder  B  and  cover  A  are  made  of  zinc 
or  tin  plate ;  the  inner  core  E  D  is  formed 
of  canvas  or  metal  gauze,  and  is  filled  with 
pieces    of  dried  chloride  of  calcium.     A 
sheet  of  blotting-paper  is  first  rolled  round 
this  core,  and  afterwards   the    sheets  of  f 
sensitised  paper;  it  is  then  put  into  the  l 
cylinder,  the  lid  adjusted,  and  a  band  of          Fiff-  9°» 
vulcanised  india-rubber  placed  over  the  joining,  as  shown 
at  0,  which  renders  the  whole  air-tight. 

Whenever  anv  of  the  sheets  of  paper  are  required  to 
F  3 


PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 


be  taken  from  either  form  of  apparatus,  it  should  be  closed 
again  as  quickly  as  possible,  because  the  chloride  of  calcium 
very  rapidly  attracts  moisture  from  the  air;  from  which 
circumstance  its  peculiar  action  of  keeping  perfectly  dry 
the  air  in  the  interior  of  the  boxes  depends. 

When  the  chloride  of  calcium  has  been  some  time  in 
use,  it  becomes  covered  with  moisture,  and  eventually 
converted  into  a  liquid,  and  its  action  destroyed.  So  soon 
as  any  moisture  is  perceived,  it  ought  to  be  placed  in  a 
moderately  hot  oven,  in  a  porcelain  or  iron  vessel,  until 
perfectly  dry,  when  its  properties  will  be  entirely  restored. 
Thus  the  same  quantity  of  chloride  of  calcium  can  be  used 
over  and  over  again  for  any  length  of  time  required. 

3.  Exposure  of  the  Prepared  Paper  to  Light. 

A  printing  frame  is  procured,  furnished  with  screws 

for  large  plates,  and  with 
springs  for  small  nega- 
tives. The  instrument 
(Fig.  91)  consists  of  a 
simple  wooden  frame, 
at  the  bottom  of  which 
is  a  strong  piece  of 
plate  glass,  which  should 
be  always  well  cleaned 
-  on  both  sides  before 
I  using.  The  negative  is 
placed  on  this  glass  with 
the  plain  side  down- 
wards, while  the  sensitised  side  of  the  paper  is  brought 
into  contact  with  the  collodion  film,  which  is,  of  course, 
uppermost. 

In  order  to  maintain  perfect  contact  between  the  sen- 
sitised paper  and  the  negative,  the  printing-frame  is  fur- 
nished with  a  hinged  board  lined  with  cloth  or  felt,  and 
kept  in  its  place  by  transverse  bars  with  springs  or  screws. 
If  it  be  desired  to  examine  the  progress  of  the  printing,, 
one  of  the  transverse  bars  is  removed,  the  hinged  board 
is  opened,  and  one  half  of  the  paper  bent  back,  as  shown 
in  Fig.  92.  This  operation  should,  of  course,  not  be  per- 
formed in  the  direct  sun -light,  but  in  the  shade. 


Fig.  91.  Printing  Frame. 


EXPOSURE  OF  THE  PREPARED  PAPER. 


107 


A  consideration  of  the  following  list  of  successive 
changes,  through  which  the  paper  passes,  will  guide  the 
operator  in  judging  when  a  print  has  been  sufficiently 
exposed. 


'Fig.  92.  How  t.i  examine  the  Acli^n  of  Ligh ,  on  the  Paper. 

The  paper  turns — 

1.  Very  pale  blue. 

2.  Pale  blue. 

3.  Clear  bluish  purple. 

4.  Deep  purple. 

5.  Black. 

6.  Metallic  greyish  black. 

7.  Olive,  or  greenish  bronze. 

It  is  not  sufficient  that  the  picture  when  examined,  as 
shown  in  Fig.  92,  should  seem  to  be  printed  deep  enough, 
because  the  fixing  agent  removes  a  great  deal  of  the  depth 
of  the  colour;  on  this  account,  and  in  order  that  the 
finished  print  should  possess  the  proper  depth  of  tone,  it 


108  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

is  necessary  that  the  tint  imparted  by  exposure  in  the 
printing  frame  should  be  much  deeper  than  is  required 
for  the  finished  picture. 

The  time,  then,  for  withdrawing  the  paper  from  the 
action  of  the  sun  or  light,  depends  solely  on  the  method 
of  fixing,  and  is  best  learned  by  experience. 

Pressure -frames  should  be  made  with  the  greatest  care, 
for  if,  for  example,  the  back  for  pressing  the  paper  against 
the  glass  should  not  be  quite  flat,  the  paper  will  in  some 
places  be  away  from  the  negative,  while  in  other  parts 
the  contact  will  be  complete,  and  the  resulting  positive- 
image  will  bear  evidence  of  unequal  sharpness,  thus 
marring  the  beauty  of  the  picture. 

Professional  photographers,  who  generally  have  a  great 
many  negatives  to  print  from,  arrange  the  pressure -frames 
on  a  framework,  so  constructed  as  to  admit  of  the  angle 
of  inclination  being  altered  in  such  a  way  as  to  receive 
the  solar  rays  perpendicularly. 

The  more  vigorous  and  fully  developed  the  negative, 
the  more  brilliant  and  satisfactory  is  the  resulting  positive 
proof.  But  if  the  negative  be  a  weak  one,  it  is  possible, 
notwithstanding,  to  produce  a  passable  print  from  it  by 
prolonging  the  action  of  the 
solar  rays.  To  this  end  the 
frame  is  exposed  not  to  the 
direct  rays  of  the  sun,  but  to 
diffused  daylight.  Or  better 
still,  the  printing  frame  may 
be  covered,  as  shown  in  Fig. 
94:,  by  a  light  frame,  upon 

which  is  stretched  a  piece  of 

fig.  03.  v^nette  G:asscs  for  Gia~  thick  white  paper.     When  it 
is  desired  to  produce  portraits 

with  a  white  background,  glasses  with  yellow  borders 
and  white  centres  are  employed,  called  vignette  glasses, 
as  shown  in  Fig.  93. 

It  will  be  understood  that  the  yellow  portion  of  these 
glasses  prevents  the  passage  of  the  chemical  rays,  and  as 
the  action  of  light  on  the  chloride  of  silver  takes  place 
only  through  the  colourless  portion  of  the  glass,  that  is  to 
say,  in  the  centre,  it  follows  that  from  an  ordinary  negative 
a  picture  may  be  obtained  with  a  white  background. 


EXPOSURE    OF    THE    PREPARED    PAPER. 


109 


When  the  background  of  a  negative  is  not  sufficiently 
developed,  or  is  defective  through  any  other  cause,  it  be- 
comes very  difficult  to  remedy.  Some  persons  paint  in  the 
background,  others  cut  out  the  figure  from  a  positive  print 
and  paste  the  matrix,  or  background  portion,  on  the 


iij.  94.  Movcable  Framework  for  Printing  Positives. 


negative ;  but  in  either  case  the  outline  of  the  picture  is 
always  hard  and  disagreeable.  A  better  plan  is  to  cover 
the  pressure  frame  with  the  vignette  glass,  Fig.  93, 
taking  care,  of  course,  to  place  the  oval  in  such  a  posi- 
tion that  only  the  bust  shall  be  printed,  while  the  defective 
background  is  as  much  as  possible  masked. 

The  following  is  the  method  adopted  when'it  is  desired 
to  produce  the  effect  of  clouds  in  a  proof ;  firstly,  a  negative 
is  taken  with  the  ordinary  exposure,  in  wrhich  the  sky 
will  be  perfectly  black;  secondly, another  negative  is  taken 


110  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

with  such  a  short  exposure  that  nothing  appears  when  the 
developing  solution  is  poured  on  but  the  sky.  With  this 
short  exposure  the  effect  of  clouds  is  very  successfully 
obtained. 

A  positive  being  printed  from  the  first  negative  will  have, 
of  course,  a  white  sky ;  this  being  placed  under  the  second, 
or  cloud  negative,  the  foreground  of  which  is  covered  with 
cotton  wool  in  such  a  way  that  light  can  pass  only  through 
that  portion  of  the  glass  bearing  the  image  of  the  clouds. 
The  outline  of  the  objects  in  the  landscape  is  covered 
with  cotton  wool,  the  fibres  of  which  have  been  well 
pulled  out,  in  order  that  the  hardness  which  would  be 
otherwise  produced  may  be  moderated  and  toned  down. 
An  exposure  of  a  few  minutes  will  be  found  sufficient  to 
produce  the  desired  effect. 

To  produce  a  similar  effect  artificially  is  even  still  more 
easy.  In  taking  the  negative  it  is  arranged  in  the  expo- 
sure that  the  sky  shall  not  be  too  deep,  and  the  desired 
cloud  effects  are  painted,  not  on  the  film,  but  on  the 
other  side  of  the  glass.  It  should  be  remembered,  how- 
ever, that  the  effect  produced  in  the  positive  proof  will 
be  the  reverse  of  what  is  painted  on  the  glass. 

A  recently  varnished  negative  should  not  be  imme- 
diately printed  from  under  the  direct  rays  of  the  sun,  for 
however  good  the  varnish  employed  may  be,  it  invariably 
sticks  a  little  when  freshly  applied.  Instead  of  exposing 
to  direct  sunlight,  use  diffused  daylight,  or  better  still, 
cover  the  pressure -frame  with  a  case  or  covering  of  white 
paper. 

Paper  should  be  made  perfectly  dry  after  sensitising, 
and  before  being  placed  in  contact  with  the  negative, 
otherwise  the  moisture  in  the  fibres  of  the  paper  will  be 
volatilised  by  the  sun's  heat,  and  condense  on  the  negative, 
which  will  soon  become  blackened  by  the  nitrate  of  silver 
of  the  paper.  When  this  is  discovered  in  time,  the  spots 
so  produced  may  be  removed  by  cyanide  of  potassium ; 
the  operation,  however,  requires  great  dexterity  and 
judgment. 

Negatives  should  never  be  allowed  to  remain  all  night 
in  contact  with  paper  at  all  damp,  as  the  depression  of 
temperature  induces  a  condensation  of  moisture  on  the 
surface  of  the  glass,  and  brings  about  the  same  untoward 


TONING    AND    FIXING    THE    PRINT.  Ill 

result  as  occurs  under  the  circumstances  detailed  in  the 
preceding  paragraph. 

Unusual  precautions  are  necessary  in  the  use  of  albu- 
menised  paper,  which  easily  sticks  to  the  negative,  and 
shows  stains  wherever  it  is  touched.  It  should  be  handled 
only  by  the  extreme  edges. 

It  is  very  important  that  the  woodwork  of  pressure - 
frames  should  be  well  put  together,  so  that  no  warping 
shall  occur  through  changes  of  temperature  or  differences 
in  the  hygrometric  condition  of  the  atmosphere  ;  other- 
wise the  prints  will  not  be  equally  sharp  over  the  entire 
surface,  owing  to  the  unequal  contact  between  the  paper 
and  glass  induced  by  the  warping.  Moreover,  the  nega- 
tives are  very  likely  to  become  cracked  from  the  same 
cause. 

A  great  many  sheets  of  positive  paper  may  be  prepared 
at  a  time,  on  the  sole  condition  of  keeping  them  in  a  box 
with  chloride  of  calcium,  as  described  at  page  105.  This 
box,  however,  ought  not  to  be  opened  oftener  than  is  abso- 
lutely necessary,  but  enough  paper  should  be  withdrawn 
at  one  time  to  serve  for  two  days'  consumption. 

Before  placing  the  negative  in  the  pressure-frame,  the 
plate -glass  should  be  carefully  wiped,  in  order  to  avoid 
the  accumulation  of  dust  on  the  proof. 

When  the  paper  is  placed  in  the  frame  the  screws  must 
be  tightly  adjusted,  so  as  to  secure  it  against  the  slightest 
movement  when  the  hinged  back  is  opened  to  examine 
the  progress  of  the  printing. 

The  frame  itself  should  be  a  little  larger  than  the 
hinged  back,  in  order  that  the  latter  may  open  without 
difficulty.  If  it  be  so  tight  as  to  require  on  effort  to 
open  it,  there  will  almost  invariably  occur  a  displacement 
of  the  negative,  and  a  consequent  doubling  of  the  outline 
in  the  proof. 

4.    Toning  and  Fixing  the  Print. 

The  process  of  toning  is  employed  to  impart  a  pleasing 
tint  to  the  proof,  and  the  object  of  fixing  is  to  remove 
the  unaltered  chloride  of  silver  by  immersion  in  a  solu- 
tion of  hyposulphite  of  soda. 

In  order  to  avoid  constantly  touching  the  proof  during 


112  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

these  operations,  horn  or  boxwood  forceps  are  employed, 
or  glass  rods  bent  as  shown  in  Figs.  95  and  96. 


Fig.  95. 

Many  formulae  have  been  given  for  toning  and  fixing 
the  prints,  in  some  of  which 
the  two  operations  are  con- 
ducted simultaneously  ;  in 
others  the  fixing  is  done  be- 
fore the  toning,  and  in  a  third 
the  toning  is  effected  before 
the  fixing. 

The    latter   process,    how- 
Fig'  96*  ever,  is  the  one  by  which  the 

best  results  and  the  greatest  permanency  are  obtained. 
It  consists  of  four  operations :  1.  Washing  the  print,  to 
remove  the  free  nitrate  of  silver  adhering  to  the  surface, 
and  which  has  remained  unchanged  by  light.  2.  Toning 
in  a  weak  solution  of  chloride  of  gold,  to  which  a  small 
quantity  of  carbonate  of  soda  has  been  added.  3. 
Washing  again  to  get  rid  of  the  chloride  of  gold.  4. 
Fixing  in  a  solution  of  hyposulphite  of  soda. 

The  chloride  of  calcium  box  (Fig.  89)  serves  as  well 
for  the  preservation  of  proofs  which  have  been  exposed 
to  light  as  for  sensitised  paper.  As  it  is  desirable  to  fix 
a  large  number  of  proofs  at  one  time,  it  is  recommended 
that  the  operator  should  at  the  outset  provide  himself 
with  three,  at  least,  of  the  chloride  of  calcium  boxes  ; 
one  for  preserving  the  white  chloride,  another  for  the 
paper  ready  for  immediate  use,  and  the  third  for  paper 
which  has  been  exposed  under  a  negative. 

The  room  set  apart  for  the  production  of  positive 
proofs  should  be  on  the  ground-floor,  and  the  panes  of 
glass  darkened  with  yellow  paper  ;  it  should  be  furnished 
with  several  large  wooden  troughs  for  washing,  and  an 
assortment  of  porcelain  or  brown  stoneware  trays  for 


TONING   AND    FIXING    THE    PRINT.  113 

hyposulphite  solutions,  &c.  There  should  also  be  an 
abundant  supply  of  water.  9 

The  proofs  being  taken  either  from  the  pressure -frame 
or  the  chloride  of  calcium  box,  are  plunged  one  after  the 
other  into  a  porcelain  pan  containing  rain-water,  which 
is  changed  for  every  hundred  prints.  This  bath  should 
be  at  least  one  foot  deep. 

By  far  the  greater  quantity  of  the  nitrate  of  silver 
withdrawn  from  the  sensitising  bath  still  remains  on  the 
surface  of  the  paper  after  exposure  to  light.  The  bath 
of  rain-water  dissolves  the  nitrate  of  silver,  and  when 
the  water  is  thoroughly  charged  therewith,  it  may  be 
treated  as  described  at  page  75,  by  throwing  in  an  excess 
of  common  salt,  which  produces  a  precipitate  of  cholride 
of  silver. 

There  should  not  be  more  than  ten  prints  washed  at  a 
time  in  this  bath,  and  special  care  should  be  taken  to 
prevent  any  hyposulphite  of  soda  from  falling  therein, 
on  which  account  the  bath  may  be  advantageously  covered 
with  a  plate  of  glass,  and  the  prints  touched  only  with 
boxwood  forceps. 

When  the  prints  have  been  for  about  ten  minutes  in 
the  water,  they  are  taken  out  one  at  a  time  and  immersed 
in  the  toning-bath.  To  prepare  the  toning-bath,  make 
the  two  following  standard  solutions  : — 

.-     -    f  Bicarbonate  Soda 2  drachms. 

'  (Water 32  ounces. 

_-     2   f  Chloride  Gold 30  grains. 

(Distilled  Water 32  ounces. 

Take  one  quart  of  water  and  dissolve  in  it  two  drachms 
of  common  salt;  then  add  one  ounce  of  solution  No.  1 
and  one  ounce  of  No.  2.  This  toning-bath  should  be 
kept  about  ten  minutes  before  being  used. 

The  first  prints  which  are  immersed  in  the  bath  after 
the  addition  of  the  chloride  of  gold  tone  rapidly ;  but  in 
proportion  as  the  gold  is  taken  up,  the  toning  proceeds 
more  slowly,  when  more  of  solution  No.  2  will  have  to  be 
added.  To  accelerate  the  toning  in  winter,  the  solution 
may  be  slightly  warmed  by  setting  the  dish  on  a  sheet 
of  plate  iron  heated  with  a  spirit  lamp. 

The  chloride  of  sodium  or  common  salt  is  added  to  the 


114  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

bath  to  transform  into  chloride  the  nitrate  of  silver  which 
has  not  been  washed  out,  and  which  would  otherwise 
decompose  the  Chloride  of  gold. 

The  prints  being  put  into  the  toning -bath  will  first 
become  red,  and  will  then  pass  successively  through  all 
the  intermediate  tints  between  red  and  black.  The  toning 
can  be  stopped  at  any  stage  by  immersing  the  print  in  a 
tray  of  clean  water,  which  should  be  kept  at  hand  for  the 
purpose. 

The  real  colour  is  only  seen  after  immersion  in  the 
hyposulphite  fixing  solution,  and  it  is  at  this  stage  only 
that  the  operator  can  judge  to  what  tint  he  should  tone 
his  pictures,  in  order  that  they  should  finally  possess  the 
desired  colour.  As  a  general  rule  the  bluish  black 
changes  to  a  pure  black  in  the  hyposulphite ;  less  toning 
than  is  required  to  give  the  bluish  black  produces  prints 
more  or  less  brown ;  if  the  toning  is  pushed  further  than 
the  bluish  black,  the  prints  will  be  ashy  coloured  and  flat 
when  dry. 

Prints  which  have  to  be  toned  black  must  be  printed 
deeper  than  those  which  have  to  be  toned  purple  or 
brown,  for  the  toning-bath  has  also  a  bleaching  action, 

Prints  on  albumenised  paper  require  for  toning  a  larger 
quantity  of  gold  than  prints  on  ordinary  salted  paper. 

The  toning-bath  may  be  used  over  and  over  again,  by 
adding  from  time  to  time  more  gold  and  bicarbonate  of 
soda;  but,  as  hyposulphite  of  soda  is  liable  to  be  acci- 
dentally introduced  into  it,  it  is  advisable,  where  a  large 
number  of  prints  are  produced,  to  make  a  new  one  every 
day. 

In  order  to  judge  of  the  colour  of  the  proof  it  should 
be  withdrawn  from  the  gold-bath  by  means  of  a  boxwood 
forceps,  as,  on  account  of  the  yellow  colour  of  the  bath, 
it  is  difficult  to  form  an  accurate  estimate  while  the  print 
remains  therein.  The  same  remark  may  be  applied  to 
the  colour  of  the  panes  of  glass  in  the  printing  room.  It 
has  been  said  that  they  should  be  covered  with  yellow 
paper,  but  this  applies,  of  course,  only  to  those  panes 
which  illuminate  that  part  of  the  room  in  which  the 
prints  are  either  withdrawn  from  the  pressure -frame  or 
placed  therein,  or  where  the  first  washing  with  plain 
water  takes  place.  All  the  other  operations  may  be 


TONING    AND    FIXING    THE    PRINT.  115 

safely  conducted  by  daylight,  although  it  will  be  found 
quite  as  well  to  preserve  the  whole  of  the  workshop  from 
the  direct  action  of  the  solar  rays  by  means  of  blinds. 

The  prints,  as  soon  as  they  are  taken  out  of  the  toning- 
bath,  are  immersed  in  water ;  they  are  then  washed 
several  times,  and  put  into  the  fixing-bath,  which  is 
composed  as  follows  : — 

Hyposulphite  of  Soda  8  ounces. 

Water 1  pint. 

The  fixing  will  generally  require  from  ten  to  fifteen 
minutes  ;  but  it  is  easy  to  understand  that  the  longer  the 
bath  has  been  in  use,  the  more  will  its  capacity  for  dis- 
solving chloride  of  silver  become  exhausted,  and  the 
longer  will  the  print  require  immersion,  so  that,  one 
pound  of  hyposulphite  of  soda  will  not  fix  more  than  one 
hundred  prints,  8J  in.  X  6 Jin.;  but  as  this  salt  is  very 
cheap,  to  use  it  liberally  will  make  but  a  fractional  in- 
crease in  the  cost  of  the  prints. 

The  hyposulphite  bath  should,  then,  be  often  changed, 
and  when  out  of  use  it  may  be  kept  for  the  purpose  of 
extracting  the  silver. 

The  proof  which  comes  from  the  last  bath  is  now 
rinsed  in  a  wooden  trough  filled  with  water,  to  remove 
the  excess  of  adherent  hyposulphite ;  then  allowed  to 
soak  for  two  hours  in  a  second  trough,  and  for  three 
hours  in  a  third.  There  should  be  an  extra  trough  or 
dish  for  every  twenty-five  prints  of  8J  in.  X  6|  in. 
When  the  prints  are  allowed  to  remain  longer  in  the 
water  than  is  specified  above,  they  lose  their  beautiful 
colour  and  become  yellow. 

It  is  sometimes  desired  to  finish  the  washing  of  a  print 
somewhat  hurriedly,  and  yet  to  ensure  the  complete 
removal  of  every  trace  of  hyposulphite  of  soda;  when 
this  is  the  case,  the  proof  is  placed  on  a  glass  plate  of 
suitable  size,  and  moved  about  under  a  stream  of  water 
from  a  tap  falling  from  a  height  of  about  six  feet.  The 
motion  imparted  to  the  glass  should  be  so  regulated  as 
to  allow  the  water  to  fall  on  every  part  of  the  proof  in 
succession,  without  tearing  it  or  causing  its  separation 
from  the  glass.  Five  minutes  of  this  energetic  washing 
removes  the  hyposulphite  more  effectually  than  five  hours 


116  PHOTOGRAPHIC  PROCESSES. 

soaking  in  the  troughs  of  water,  although  it  is  obvious 
that  the  consumption  of  water  is  much  greater.  A  badly 
fixed  or  imperfectly  washed  print  undergoes  spontaneous 
alteration  after  a  few  weeks. 

The  following  may  be  received  as  practical  rules  to 
avoid  the  fading  of  prints. 

As  silver  forms,  with  hyposulphite  of  soda,  a  double 
salt,  slightly  soluble  in  a  feeble  excess  of  hyposulphite 
of  soda,  but  on  the  contrary  very  soluble  in  a  con- 
centrated solution, — and  as  this  double  hyposulphite 
of  silver  and  soda  decomposes  with  great  facility, — it 
is  very  important  that  concentrated  solutions  should  be 
used,  in  order  that  the  double  salt  shall  be  dissolved  as 
soon  as  formed. 

A  bath  such  as  that  of  which  the  formula  has  been 
given,  must  not  be  used  too  long,  and  for  the  same  reason 
too  many  proofs  must  not  be  immersed  therein  at  one 
time,  especially  if  there  be  not  sufficient  space  between 
each  proof  to  allow  the  bath  to  exert  its  full  solvent 
action. 

All  the  formula3  which  prescribe  the  addition  of  an 
alkali  or  an  acid  to  the  bath  should  be  unhesitatingly  re- 
jected. The  chloride  of  gold  of  commerce  is  sometimes 
very  acid,  in  which  case  it  may  be  replaced,  if  desired,  by 
a  white  salt  known  by  the  name  of  Sel  d'Or  de  Fordos 
et  Gelis ;  this  must  be  very  much  diluted  before  mixing 
with  the  hyposulphite  of  soda. 

If  the  proof,  through  insufficient  washing,  contains 
hyposulphite  of  soda,  it  will  have,  when  dry,  a  sweet 
taste,  and  will  fade  in  a  very  short  time. 

Finally,  all  fermented  or  fermentable  substances  for 
mounting  photographs,  should  be  rejected.  Nothing  but 
recently  prepared  starch-paste  should  be  used,  and  the 
proof  should  be  allowed  to  dry  very  rapidly  when  mounted, 
in  order  that  no  acid  principles  may  be  developed  by 
fermentation. 

In  rainy  climates  in  winter — in  England,  for  ex-ample 
— it  is  sometimes  necessary  to  expose  the  paper  for  a 
whole  day  to  the  light  before  a  positive  can  be  obtained. 
Albumenised  paper  being  much  more  rapid  than  simple 
salted  paper,  will  therefore  be  preferred,  although  even 
this  will  sometimes  fail  to  produce  a  positive  in  a  reason- 


TONING    AND    FIXING    THE    PRINT.  117 

able  time,  in  which  case  recourse  may  be  had  to  the  follow- 
ing expedient. 

Plain  paper  being  cut  to  the  proper  dimensions,  and  the 
reverse  side  marked  with  a  pencil,  is  allowed  to  float 
for  about  one  minute  on  a  bath  composed  of  300  grains 
of  iodide  of  potassium  dissolved  in  35  ounces  of  water. 
This  bath  serves  until  it  is  exhausted,  and  the  paper  when 
dry  and  placed  in  a  portfolio  will  keep  a  long  time.  The 
paper  so  prepared  is  rendered  sensitive  to  light  by  floating 
(in  the  dark,  of  course)  on  a  bath  of  nitrate  of  silver  for 
one  minute.  The  bath  is  composed  of — 

Water 3i  ounces. 

Fused  Nitrate  Silver 30:   grains, 

Glacial  Acetic  Acid 300      „ 

The  paper  is  withdrawn  from  the  bath,  well  drained,  and 
rapidly  dried  between  folds  of  blotting-paper,  in  order  to 
remove  the  excess  of  -solution,  and  prevent  its  touching 
the  back  of  the  paper.  This  operation  is  repeated  with 
a  second  and  even  a  third  sheet  of  blotting-paper.  It  is 
necessary  that  the  sensitised  sheet  should  be  damp,  but 
not  to  such  a  degree  as  to  stain  the  negative,  upon  which 
it  should  be  pressed  very  lightly. 

The  exposure  to  diffused  daylight  varies  between  five 
and  fifteen  seconds  ;  a  long  exposure  yields  a  flat  picture, 
deficient  in  brilliancy — in  a  short  one  the  sky  only 
appears. 

The  paper  is  carefully  removed  from  the  negative,  and 
placed  on  a  sheet  of  glass  with  the  sensitised  side  upper- 
most. A  solution  is  then  made  of  15  grains  of  gallic 
acid  in  35  ounces  of  warm  water,  to  which  is  added  3| 
drachms  of  glacial  acetic  acid.  This  is  filtered  and 
spread  very  quickly  by  means  of  a  brush  or  glass  rod  over 
the  sensitised  side  of  the  sheet.  The  image  appears  very 
rapidly,  and  as  soon  as  the  desired  effect  is  arrived  at, 
the  paper  is  plunged  into  water  to  arrest  the  action  of 
the  developer. 

After  washing,  it  is  toned  with  chloride  of  gold,  as 
described  at  page  113,  and  it  is  then  washed  for  two  hours 
in  a  large  trough  of  water. 


118  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 


5.  Mounting  the  Proofs. 

Whatever  process  may  have  been  adopted  in  the  pro- 
duction of  the  positive  print,  it  has  finally  to  be  pasted 
on  Bristol  board,  and  rolled. 

Nothing  is  more  simple  than  the  mounting  of  a  proof. 
It  is  cut  into  any  suitable  or  desired  form,  and  the  back 
covered  with  starch-paste.  It  is  then  spread  on  the 
Bristol  board,  a  piece  of  blotting-paper  laid  over  it,  and 
the  whole  rubbed  with  the  hand  in  every  direction,  in 
order  to  ensure  complete  contact  between  the  print  and 
the  board.  This  being  done,  it  is  allowed  to  dry  in  the 
air,  and  subsequently  rolled  in  a  lithographic  or  other 
press,  by  which  it  acquires  a  finishing  gloss,  which  is 
entirely  absent  in  unrolled  prints. 

Poirier's  press,  represented  in  Fig.  97,  is  very  applic- 
able for  this  purpose.  It  is  composed  of  a  steel  roller,  E, 
the  axle  blocks  of  which  are  moveable  in  a  vertical  direc- 
tion ;  double  levers  are  employed  to  make  the  necessary 
adjustment,  and  the  power  is  applied  at  &  b.  It  is  suffi- 
cient to  move  one  only  of  these  heads  in  order  to  move 
the  other,  there  being  an  arrangement  of  cog-wheels 
for  this  purpose.  However,  for  delicate  adjustments, 
the  power  is  best  applied  to  each  screw-head  separately, 
which,  in  turning,  depresses  two  screws  attached  to  the 
axle -blocks,  these  latter  sliding  between  two  edges  of 
cast-iron. 

The  other  part  of  the  apparatus  consists  of  a  plate  of 
planed  polished  steel,  a  a,  or  of  a  very  flat  lithographic 
stone,  which  receives  its  backward  and  forward  motion 
from  a  toothed  wheel,  moved  by  a  still  smaller  one,  which 
in  its  turn  is  moved  by  a  long  lever  or  handle. 

Upon  this  steel  plate  two  very  smooth  and  specially 
prepared  cards  are  placed,  between  which  the  proof  to  be 
rolled  is  laid.  The  screws  being  adjusted,  and  the  motion 
imparted,  the  steel  plate  moves  on,  turning  the  cylinder 
at  the  same  time.  An  enormolis  pressure  is  thus  brought 
to  bear  uniformly  over  the  whole  surface  of  the  card,  and 
after  two  or  three  movements  to  and  fro,  the  screws  6  b 
are  slightly  tightened,  and  the  rolling  repeated. 

The  proof  thus  becomes  pressed  into  the  cardboard, 


TONING   AND    FIXING    THE    PRINT. 


119 


and  acquires  a  splendid  gloss.  To  mount  stereoscopic 
views  and  cartes  de  visite,  they  should  be  cut  by  means  of 
a  steel  or  glass  mould  and  a  good  knife. 

It  is  a  good  plan  to  paste  a  great  many  proofs  on  one 
card,  in  order  to  effect  the  glazing  by  one  operation. 

A  beautiful  gloss  can  be  imparted  to  stereoscopic  and 
carte  de  visite  proofs  by  varnishing  them.  This  varnish  is 
made  as  follows  : — One  ounce  of  white  lac  is  dissolved 


Fig.  97.  Rolling  Press. 

in  ten  ounces  of  warm  alcohol,  and  after  allowing  the 
bottle  to  stand  for  several  weeks,  the  clear  portion  is 
decanted  for  use. 

This  varnish  is  then  applied  in  a  similar  manner  to 
that  adopted  by  French  polishers  in  polishing  cabinet 


120  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

work ;  it  has  been  introduced  into  commerce  under  the 
name  of  Crystal  Enamel. 

The  picture  having  been  mounted,  is  sized  with  a  warm 
solution  made  by  dissolving  10  grains  of  Swinborne's 
gelatine  in  1  ounce  of  water,  and  either  hot-pressed  or 
burnished  with  an  agate  burnisher.  It  is  then  coated 
with  the  crystal  enamel,  applied  in  the  following  manner  : 
— A  tampion  of  cotton -wool  saturated  with  the  liquid  is 
wrapped  in  a  piece  of  clean  white  calico  rag,  the  outer 
surface  of  which  is  touched  with  a  drop  or  two  of  linseed 
oil :  this  is  gently  and  evenly  applied  with  a  circular 
motion  over  the  whole  surface  to  be  enamelled,  until  the 
picture  becomes  brilliant.  It  is,  lastly,  finished  off  by 
applying,  in  the  same  manner,  alcohol  and  linseed  oil. 


NOTES. 


NOTE  1  (page  4). 
APPEARANCE  OF  NEGATIVES. 

The  difference  of  the  reverse  appearance  of  an  ordinary  negative  on 
glass  or  paper,  and  the  direct  one  exhibited  by  a  metal  plate,  is  simply 
apparent  and  not  real,  and  arises  solely  from  the  mirror-like  appearance 
in  those  parts  of  the  silver  plate  not  acted  on  by  light.  And  this  explains 
the  reason  why  it  is  necessary  to  give  to  these  '(daguerreotype)  pictures  a 
particular  position  in  relation  to  the  angle  at  which  the  light  strikes 
them.  At  other  angles,  when,  for  example,  the  light  is  directly  reflected 
from  the  surface  of  the  metal,  the  image  appears  as  a  negative. 


NOTE  2  (page  16). 
DISTILLATION  OF  ETHER. 

The  object  aimed  at  in  the  distillation  of  a  liquid  is  the  separation  of 
any  solid  substance  which  it  holds  in  solution,  or  any  liquid  of  a  dif- 
ferent constitution  with  which  it  may  be  mixed.  In  the  instance  under 
consideration,  it  is  necessary  to  separate  the  ether,  not  only  from  the 
chloride  of  calcium  upon  which  it  has  been  dried,  but  also  from  the 
alcohol  and  water  which  it  contains. 

The  boiling  point  of  ether  being  about  96°  Fahr.,  and  of  alcohol  ]  74° 
Fahr.,  and  water  212°  Fahr.,  it  follows,  that  if  a  mixture  of  the  three  be 
submitted  to  the  action  of  heat,  the  ether  will  be  almost  completely 
volatilised  before  any  sensible  evaporation  of  the  alcohol  or  water  has 
taken  place.  A  tube  thermometer,  having  its  stem  passed  through  the 
cork,  and  its  bulb  so  arranged  as  not  to  come  into  contact  with  the 
liquid,  will  indicate  a  temperature  of  about  96°,  rising  higher  in  propor- 
tion as  more  alcohol  and  water  become  evaporated.  To  secure  pure 
ether,  the  temperature  should  not  rise  higher  than  104°. 

G 


122  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

The  first  portions  which  come  over  should  not  be  used,  as  they  gene- 
rally serve  only  to  cleau  the  condensing  tube,  and,  consequently,  contain 
impurities.  From  two  pints  of  ether,  therefore,  the  first  ounce  and  a 
half  which  comes  over  should  be  rejected. 


NOTE  3  (page  18). 
PREPARATION  OF  PYROXYLINE. 

The  cotton  should  be  chosen  free  from  defects  and  any  contaminating 
organic  matter.  A  mixture  is  then  made  of 

Sulphuric  Acid  (Sp.  Gr.  1*8)  38  fluid  ounces. 
Nitric  Acid (Sp.  Gr.  T4)  19    do,       do. 

This  is  stirred  with  a  glass  rod,  and  if  examined  by  a  thermometer  will 
be  found  to  indicate  a  temperature  of  176°  Fahr. ;  the  operator  should 
therefore  wait  until  it  cools  down  to  140°  Fahr.  before  plunging  in  the 
cotton. 

The  quantity  of  cotton  to  use  is  about  1,050  grains,  which  is  added  to 
the  acids,  about  one-fourth  or  one-fifth  part  at  a  time,  squeezing  it  with 
the  glass  rods  in  order  to  force  out  the  air  imprisoned  between  the  fibres. 
When  all  the  cotton  is  immersed,  the  containing  vessel  is  covered  with 
a  plate  to  keep  in  the  nitrous  vapours,  and  at  the  end  of  ten  minutes  the 
cotton  is  withdrawn,  and  copiously  drenched  with  water,  as  before 
described.  The  pyroxyline  thus  obtained  is  less  soluble  in  ether  and 
alcohol  than  that  obtained  by  the  ordinary  method ;  but  it  is  especially 
useful  when  great  tenacity  of  film  is  required. 


NOTE  4  (page  19). 
EMPLOYMENT  OF  THE  IODIDES  AND  BROMIDES. 

Besides  iodide  and  bromide  of  cadmium,  a  great  number  of  other 
iodides  have  been  used,  among  which  may  be  mentioned  those  of  potas- 
sium, sodium,  ammonium,  zinc,  &c. 

Many  photographers  confine  themselves  to  the  use  of  the  iodides 
of  potassium  and  ammonium,  but  lately  iodide  of  cadmium  has  come 
generally  into  use. 

More  recently  has  been  proposed,  especially  for  copying  pictures,  a 
collodion,  containing  iodide,  bromide,  and  chloride  of  ethylamine.  The 
following  is  the  formula  which  has  given  the  best  results : — 


NOTES.  123 

Alcohol 1'i  ounce. 

Ether 2'f     „ 

Pyroxyline 15  grains. 

Iodide  of  Ethylamine 1'2      ,, 

Bromide         ditto      04     ,, 

Chloride         ditto      0'2     „ 

Although  iodide  of  ethylamine  is  not  found  in  commerce,  it  is  very 
easy  to  prepare.  It  is  an  organic  iodide,  containing  nitrogen,  and  the 
elements  of  alcohol,  but  is  nevertheless  more  stable  than  iodine  of  ammo- 
nium, and  yields  pictures  of  remarkable  delicacy. 


NOTE  5  (page  34). 
NITRATE  OF  SILVER  STAINS. 

Nitrate  of  silver  is  reduced  by  contact  with  all  organic  substances,  and 
as  finely-divided  metallic  silver  is  black,  it  follows  that  this  substance 
blackens  everything  it  touches,  as  every  photographer  knows.  Many 
methods  have  been  proposed  for  the  removal  of  these  spots.  The  follow- 
ing is  the  best. 

The  hands  become  inevitably  stained  while  conducting  the  manipula- 
tions involved  in  the  sensitising  and  development  of  the  plates,  but  it  is 
not  until  some  hours  have  elapsed  that  the  stains,  at  first  scarcely  visible, 
deepen  to  any  great  extent;  and  it  is  only  when  a  great  number  of 
proofs  have  been  taken  that  the  method  about  to  be  proposed  is  required 
or  advisable. 

It  consists  simply  in  well  washing  the  hands  in  a  saturated  solution 
of  hyposulphite  of  soda,  kept  expressly  for  that  purpose.  Two  or  three 
minutes'  contact  are  found  sufficient  to  remove  every  trace  of  the  stain. 
Instead  of  hyposulphite  of  soda,  iodide  of  potassium  may  be  used  in  the 
same  way.  After  the  hyposulphite,  it  is  advisable  to  wash  the  hands 
with  soap,  and  with  powdered  and  sifted  pumice  stone. 

If  the  stains  are  very  old,  it  is  better  to  allow  them  to  wear  away  by 
time ;  however,  as  they  sometimes  are  obliged  to  be  removed,  in  that 
case,  a  mixture  of  cyanide  of  potassium  and  iodine  applied  to  the  fingers 
by  a  brush,  or  otherwise,  will,  if  aided  by  the  use  of  a  lump  of  pumice 
stone,  rapidly  restore  the  hands  to  their  normal  condition,  after  which 
they  should  be  well  rinsed  with  plenty  of  water. 

In  the  use  of  this  latter  re-agent  for  the  purpose  indicated,  it  is 
important  to  remember  that  cyanide  of  potassium  is  an  energetic  poison, 
which  acts  not  only  internally,  but  externally,  by  absorption ;  so  that  it 
should  never  be  used  when  there  is  the  slightest  wound  or  scratch  upon 
the  hands. 

If  this  advice  be  neglected,  serious  results  may  follow.  It  is  also 
advisable  that  this  mixture  should  only  be  prepared  at  the  time  of  using 
it,  and  that  every  vessel  which  has  contained  it  should  be  carefully 
cleaned. 

G    2 


124  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

NOTE  6  (page  35). 
PREPARATION  OF  THE  NITRATE  OF  SILVER  BATH. 

Into  a  graduated  glass  is  placed  1,200  grains  of  nitrate  of  silver,  upon 
which  ia  poured  7  ounces  of  distilled  water.  When  the  nitrate  is  all  dis- 
solved, which  can  be  hastened  by  well  stirring  with  a  glass  rod,  there  is 
to  be  added  3  drams  of  an  alcoholic  solution  of  iodide  of  cadmium,  con- 
taining 10  grains  to  the  ounce  ;  a  yellow  precipitate  is  immediately  pro- 
duced. The  whole  is  well  agitated  together,  and  left  to  itself  for  about 
one  quarter  of  an  hour;  more  distilled  water  is  then  added  to  make  up 
the  quantity  of  35  ounces ;  it  is  then  filtered,  and  is  ready  for  use. 


NOTE  7  (page  55). 
PREPARATION  OF  PYROGALLIC  ACID. 

This  substance  was  discovered  by  Scheele,  who  supposed  it  to  be  sub- 
limed gallic  acid.  It  contains  the  elements  of  gallic  acid,  minus  those 
of  carbonic  acid. 

Dry  and  pure  pyrogallic  acid  has  the  form  of  lamellar  needles,  or 
elongated  plates,  which  are  soluble  in  2J  parts  of  water  at  ordinary 
temperature,  and  a  little  less  soluble  in  ether  and  alcohol.  It  has  a  very 
bitter  taste,  and  when  quite  pure,  does  not  redden  tincture  of  litmus.  A 
solution  of  the  pure  acid  will  keep,  so  to  speak,  indefinitely,  especially  if, 
as  is  the  case  when  it  is  prepared  for  photographic  use,  an  acid  be  added. 

It  is  of  the  highest  importance  to  keep  pyrogallic  acid  in  stoppered 
bottles,  in  the  dark  ;  since,  unless  this  be  done,  it  gradually  turns  brown, 
through  combination  with  the  oxygen  of  the  air,  and  its  properties 
injured. 

Pyrogallic  acid  is  prepared  by  boiling  bruised  nut-galls,  with  seven  or 
eight  times  their  weight  of  water,  for  three  or  four  hours,  replacing  the 
water  as  fast  as  it  evaporates.  The  whole  is  then  thrown  on  a  strainer, 
and  the  dirty  cake  of  nut-galls  being  submitted  to  powerful  pressure,  in 
order  to  remove  all  the  liquid. 

The  mixed  liquors  are  then  evaporated,  first,  by  rapid  ebullition,  and 
afterwards  more  gently,  until  they  acquire  the  consistence  of  an  extract, 
which  extract  is  rendered  perfectly  dessicated  by  careful  drying  in  a 
stove. 

This  product  is  then  heated  for  ten  or  twelve  hours  in  a  flat  iron 
vessel,  over  the  top  of  which  is  stretched  a  piece  of  perforated  paper,  the 
whole  being  covered  by  a  conical  paper  cap.  The  vessel  is  placed  on  a 
sand-bath,  and  the  temperature,  which  should  not  rise  higher  than  420° 
Fahr.,  is  indicated  by  one,  or,  still  better,  two  thermometers.  And  this 
is  the  most  delicate  part  of  the  operation.  If  the  heat  be  insufficient,  no 
result  is  obtained,  and  if  it  be  too  much  heated,  another  product  is 
obtained  which  contains  no  pyrogallic  acid. 

Operating  in  this  way,  100  parts  of  dry  extract  yield  5  parts  of  pure 
pyrogallic  acid,  and  at  a  more  advanced  stage  of  the  sublimation,  5  parts 
of  impure  acid,  which  may  be  purified  by  resublimation. 


NOTES.  125 


NOTE  8  (page  47). 
PHOTOGRAPHIC  OPTICS. 

The  reader  will  readily  understand  that  it  is  by  no  means  easy  in  BO 
limited  a  work  as  the  present  to  give  a  clear  idea  of  photographic  optics ; 
the  observations  to  be  made  will  therefore  be  confined  to  demonstrations 
of  the  fundamental  principles  only  of  the  most  advanced  of  the  sciences. 

The  ultimate  constitution  or  essence  of  light  is  entirely  unknown. 
Newton  entertained  the  idea  that  luminous  bodies  threw  out  in  all  direc- 
tions exceedingly  minute  corpuscles,  which,  on  coming  into  contact  with 
the  optic  nerve,  produced  a  certain  effect,  which  has  been  distinguished 
by  the  term  "  luminous  effect."  It  has,  however,  been  since  proved  that 
the  hypothesis  of  Newton  does  not  accord  with  facts,  and  the  view  most 
generally  entertained  is  to  the  effect,  that  there  exists  in  space,  per- 
meating our  atmosphere  and  all  existing  bodies,  a  luminous  ether  of 
extreme  tenuity,  to  which  luminous  bodies  have  the  property  of  com- 
municating a  vibration  similar  to  that  which  takes  place  when  a  spring 
is  suddenly  struck  ;  and  it  is  this  vibration,  communicated  with  an  almost 
inconceivable  rapidity  to  the  optic  nerve,  which  produces  the  effect 
which  is  called  light. 

It  is  not  certainly  known  whether  this  last  hypothesis  is  a  correct  one, 
but  it  is  certain  that  it  adapts  itself  most  completely  to  all  the  known 
facts  of  optics,  and  thafcit  has  materially  aided  in  the  discovery  of  some 
of  them. 

It  is  well  known  that  light  travels  in  straight  lines  at  a  rate  of  240,000 
miles  in  a  second  of  time. 

Reflection  of  light  is  that  effect  which  takes  place  when  light  falls  on 
a  plane  mirror. 

The  light  which  falls  on  a  mirror  from  a  luminous  point  is  called  the 
incident  ray,  and  that  which  reaches  the  eye  from  the  mirror  is  called 
the  reflected  ray;  and  if  a  perpendicular  be  elevated  from  the  point 
where  these  two  rays  meet,  it  will  be  found  to  make  two  equal  angles, 
or,  in  other  words,  the  angle  of  incidence  and  the  angle  of  reflection  are 
equal. 

Reflection  takes  place  with  equal  regularity  from  the  surface  of  curved 
mirrors,  but  the  image  is  modified  according  to  the  character  of  the 
curve,  which  sometimes  enlarges,  sometimes  diminishes,  sometimes  re- 
verses the  image,  and  sometimes  gives  an  erect  image. 

Refraction  is  that  phenomenon  which  is  shown  when  a  stick  is  plunged 
into  water,  by  its  appearing  as  though  it  was  broken.  It  is  also  a  well- 
known  fact,  that  the  bottoms  of  rivers  appear  to  be  a  great  deal  nearer 
than  they  really  are,  and  that  in  consequence  great  mistakes  are  some- 
times made  in  judging  of  their  depth  ;  this  phenomenon  also  belongs  to 
refraction.  In  one  word,  refraction  of  light  takes  place  whenever  a  ray 
of  light  deviates  from  its  original  course  by  passing  through  a  transpa- 
rent body  of  greater  or  less  density. 

In  the  first  place  will  be  considered  the  most  simple  case  (Fig.  98), 
in  which  a  ray  of  light  R  is  incident  on  a  plate  of  glass  A,  whose  two 
sides  are  parallel.  At  the  point  where  the  ray  R  comes  into  contact 
with  the  glass,  imagine  a  perpendicular  line  to  be  drawn,  and  then 


126 


PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 


observe  what  happens  to  the  luminous  ray.  (The  perpendicular  here 
mentioned  is  distinguished  by  the  term  normal?)  Experience  has  shown 
that  the  angle  R  N,  formed  by  the  luminous  ray  and  the  normal  ray, 
is  greater  than  the  angle  formed  by  the  same  ray  in  the  interior  of 
the  glass  with  the  same  normal  ray  prolonged ;  but  this  angle  is  constant 
for  the  same  quality  or  character  of  glass.  On  leaving  the  glass  the  ray 
assumes  a  direction  parallel  to  the  direction  of  the  primitive  ray. 

It  follows,  then,  from  what  has  been  stated,  that  a  ray  of  light  falling 
on  the  surface  of  a  piece  of  glass  is  refracted  both  on  entering  and 
leaving  the  glass. 

Figs.  99  and  100  illustrate  the  same  fact,  and  also  show  the  reflec- 
tion of  a  ray  from  the  large  face  of  a  triangular  prism. 


Fig.  99. 


Fig.  100. 


'  Fig.  98. 


The  study  of  refraction  becomes  more  difficult  when  the  two  surfaces 
of  glass,  instead  of  being  parallel,  are  placed  at  an  angle  in  relation  to 
each  other  (Fig.  101).  Suppose  two  of  these  faces  AC,  AB,  and  a 
luminous  ray  R0  falling  on  cue  of  the  surfaces.  If  it  were  not  a  prism, 


Fig.  101. 

the  ray  would  follow  the  direction  R  M ;  but  as  the  ray  R0  is  bent,  as  in 
the  preceding  case,  it  approaches  towards  the  normal  in  the  direction  o  oft 
the  angle  outside  the  prism  being  greater  than  the  angle  inside.  But 
the  reverse  happens  on  the  second  face  A  B,  at  the  point  o\  and  the  ray 
leaves  in  the  direction  o{  R'  in  such  a  manner  that  the  ray,  first  impelled 
in  the  direction  R  M,  is  finally  sent  in  the  direction  of  R',  from  which  it 
follows,  that  a  ray  of  light  is  altered  in  its  direction  by  its  passage 
through  a  piece  of  glass,  the  two  sides  of  which  are  not  parallel. 


NOTES. 


127 


Glass  lenses  are  convex  discs,  ground  and  polished,  having  an  exterior 
figure  of  a  spheroidal  character.  Their  principal  effect  is,  that  when 
they  are  exposed  to  the  suu,  the  parallel  rays  of  that  luminary  r  r  (Fig. 
102),  unite  at  a  certain  point,  called  the  focus,  all  the  rays  converging 
towards  this  point.  Inversely,  a  luminous  point  being  placed  in  the 
focus/ of  a  lens  A,  emits  rays  which,  on  leaving  the  lens,  are  parallel 


Fig.  104. 

r  r  r  r.  It  therefore  follows,  that  a  convex  lens  is  in  effect  an  assem- 
blage of  prisms,  the  inclination  of  the  two  faces  of  the  glass  from  the 
centre  to  the  circumference  being  such  that  the  parallel  rays  undergo  an 
analogous  deviation,  which  causes  them  to  meet  at  the  focus.  Fig.  104 
is  intended  to  illustrate  this  proposition. 

In  concave  lenses  the  effect  is  entirely  different.  If  solar  rays  r  r 
impinge  on  a  concave  lens  A  (Fig. 
105),  these  rays,  instead  of  uniting, 
disperse  themselves  in  the  direction 
r(  r(.  It  is,  however,  usual  to  regard 
the  point  f  as  the  focus,  resulting 
from  the  ideal  prolonging  of  the  rays 
r*  r*  and  focal  length  the  distance 
A/ 

105>  If  refraction  consisted  only  in  a 

simple  deviation  of  the  rays  of  light, 
it  would  be  a  comparatively  simple  matter,  but,  unfortunately,  it  is  no 
so  ;  the  ray  is  not  only  bent,  but  decomposed  into  its  primary  colours. 
This  statement  may  be  easily  verified  by  examining  a  white  object  on 


128 


PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 


a  dark  ground  through  one  of  the  ordinary  prisms  used  for  ornamenting 
chandeliers.  The  white  object  will  appear  fringed  with  all  the  colours  of 
the  rainbow. 

The  same  phenomenon  occurs  when  a  ray  of  light  R  (Fig.  101)  is 
allowed  to  fall  on  the  surface  of  a  prism.  The  refracted  ray  o'  R*  con- 
sists not  of  one  white  ray,  but  of  seven  different  colours.  Convex  lenses 
produce  the  same  effect.  Thus,  the  solar  rays  a  a  falling  on  a  convex 
lens  (Fig.  106)  do  not  reunite  in  one  single  point,  but  produce  at  R  a 
white  image,  bordered  above  by  red,  and  below  by  violet. 


Fig.  106. 


107. 


It  is  possible,  however,  to  unite  two  prisms  (Fig.  109)  in  such  a  way 
that  the  rays  &'  b  falling  thereon,  shall  leave  it  at  a*  a  void  of  colour  ; 
such  a  combination  of  glasses  is  called  an  achromatic  prism.  These 
prisms  are  composed  of  two  kinds  of  glass — crystal,  or  flint,  and  crown,  or 
ordinary  glass. 

There  are  not  only  achromatic  prisms,  but  lenses,  which  yield  images 
free  from  colour.  The  curve  which  a  particular  kind  of  glass  is  to 
receive  in  order  that  the  compound  lens  shall  be  most  effectually  achro- 
matised,  forms  the  subject  of  a  mathematical  calculation.  The  curve  is 
then  imparted  by  grinding  the  glass  by  hand  in  a  suitable  tool. 


Fig.  108. 


Fig.  109. 


Fig.  110. 


Fig.  111. 


There  are  many  different  kinds  of  lenses.  Fig.  108  shows  three  forms 
of  non-achromatic  convex  lenses,  and  Fig.  110  these  same  lenses  achro- 
matised.  Figs.  109  and  111  concave  lenses  non-achromatic  and 
achromatised. 

In  order  to  explain   the   application  of  lenses   in  photography,   it 


NOTES. 


129 


becomes  necessary,  in  the  first  place,  to  describe  a  very  curious  pheno- 
menon. 

In  looking  at  a  well-lighted  landscape,  it  is  obvious  that  every  point 
of  that  landscape  sends  to  us  a  ray  of  light,  since,  unless  it  were  so,  it 
could  not  be  seen  at  all. 

Tf  a  hole  be  bored  in  the  shutter  of  a  perfectly  dark  room  (Fig.  112), 
and  a  sheet  of  white  paper  be  placed  a  short  distance  from  the  aperture,  it 
will  be  seen  that,  as  every  point  of  the  view  emits  luminous  rays,  a  certain 


Fig.  112. 

number  of  these  rays  will  pass  through  the  opening  into  the  dark  chamber, 
and  being  directed  by  the  sheet  of  white  paper,  will  produce  thereon  an 
inverted  image  of  the  landscape. 

If  a  convex  lens  be  placed  in  the  hole  in  the  shutter,  and  the  sheet  of 
white  paper  brought  up  to  the  focus  of  this  lens,  the  image  will  be  in- 
creased so  much  in  sharpness  that  it  will  seem  quite  easy  to  trace  the 
outline  with  a  pencil,  or,  indeed,  to  make  a  finished  drawing.  Now,  if 
the  sheet  of  white  paper  be  replaced  by  another  sheet  of  paper  photo- 
graphically prepared  with  some  substances  acted  on  by  light — as  the 
compound  of  silver,  for  example — the  image  of  external  objects  will,  in 
a  longer  or  shorter  time,  be  depicted  thereon. 

In  Fig.  106  has  been  shown  the  remarkable  fact,  that  the  two 
white  rays  a  a  become  decomposed  into  rays  of  various  colours ;  but 
what  is  still  more  curious  is,  that  if  the  rays  a  a  were  red,  they  would 
come  to  a  focus  at  R ;  if  yellow,  nearer  the  lens  at  J,  and  if  violet,  still 
nearer  at  V.  In  one  word,  a  lens  acts  equally  only  for  light  of  one 
colour,  and  unequally  on  diiferent  colours.  Lenses  of  the  same  form, 
but  of  different  glass,  will  also  act  differently  on  the  same  light ;  and  it 
is  precisely  on  this  account  that  it  becomes  necessary  to  make  a  com- 
bination of  glasses  of  such  forms  that  all  the  colours  shall  be  equally 
refracted  and  reunited  in  one  point. 

For  this  purpose  lenses  are  made  and  placed  very  near  to  each  other, 
in  some  instances  even  united  by  Canada  balsam,  one  lens,  so  to  speak, 
for  each  colour ;  generally,  however,  the  combination  is  confined  to  two 
lenses,  uniting  only  the  two  principal  colours. 

In  the  construction  of  photographic  lenses,  the  relation  between  the 
material,  i.  e. — the  quality  and  kind  of  glass — and  the  form  or  curve 
imparted  to  it  is  calculated  in  such  a  way  as  to  unite  into  one  focus  the 
yellow  and  the  violet  rays. 


130 


PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 


Sometimes   double  and   sometimes   single  objectives  are  employed. 
The  double   objective  is  composed  of  four  lenses  mounted  in   brass. 
Fig.  53  represents  such  an  one,  and 
Tig.  113  the  arrangement  of  the  lenses. 
The  poiut  of  the  arrow  is  directed  to- 
wards the  object  to  be  taken.     This 
^     system  of  four  lenses  is  arranged  in 
such  a  manner  as  to  give  a  great  deal 
of  light  to  the  image,  to  the  sacrifice,  to 
some  extent,  of  sharpness.     A  single 
Fig.  113.  achromatic  lens  may,  however,  be  em- 

ployed which,  while  it  gives  less  light, 
wonderfully  increases  the  delicacy  of  the  details. 


NOTE  9  (page  63). 
SPOTS  ON  THE  COLLODION  FILM. 

It  is  not  intended  to  describe  all  the  kinds  of  spots  which  are  produced 
on  the  collodion  film,  but  only  those  which  occur  most  frequently. 

Spots  are  sometimes  produced  under  the  collodion  film,  and  sometimes 
upon  the  film.  The  first,  always  visible  before  exposure,  arise  generally 
from  imperfectly  cleaning  the  plate.  lu  fact,  the  dust  which  remains 
on  the  plate  are  centres  of  reduction  for  the  iodide  of  silver  constituting 
the  film,  and  thus  form  round  spots. 

Another  source  of  spots  arises  from  the  presence  of  fatty  particles  in 
the  leather  used  for  cleaning,  and  these  produce  stains  such  as  shown  at 
page  63  (fig.  65). 

In  reference  to  spots  produced  on  the  film,  they  arise  very  often  from 
light  solid  bodies  floating  in  the  collodion.  It  is,  therefore,  of  the  highest 
impoitance  always  to  use  a  collodion  which  has  stood  some  time. 

It  happens  sometimes  that  the  little  crystals  of  iodo-nitrate  which 
float  in  the  nitrate  bath  deposit  themselves  on  the  film,  and  on  this 
account  some  photographers  pour  their  silver  solution  from  a  bottle,  into 
which  it  has  been  filtered,  after  sensitising  a  considerable  number  of 
plates. 

At  other  times  the  bottom  of  the  plate  is  riddled  with  holes.  These 
are  caused  by  the  concentration  of  the  nitrate  on  account  of  the  plate 
having  been  kept  too  long  between  the  sensitising  aud  the  development. 

Sometimes,  when  the  nitrate  bath  has  not  been  filtered  for  a  long 
time,  a  pellicle  of  reduced  silver  is  formed,  which  attaches  itself  very 
firmly  to  the  film.  Veins  also  occur,  which  are  aptly  represented  by 
fig.  66,  page  63.— (M.  de  la  Blanchere.) 

A  similar  class  of  stains  sometimes  occur,  especially  on  positives,  if 
the  bath  contains  an  excess  of  alcohol,  and  they  become  visible  on  with- 
drawing the  plate  from  the  sulphate  of  iron  solution. 

The  stains  shown  in  fig.  67,  page  63,  arise  when  too  thick  a  collodion 
is  used. 


NOTES.  131 

Pyrogallic  acid  often  produces  spots.  If  the  developer  prepared  there- 
with contains  too  little  acetic  acid,  foggy  pictures  are  the  result.  If  it 
contains  too  much,  the  development  proceeds  very  slowly.  But  spots 
occur  less  frequently  in  the  latter  case  than  the  former. 

Should  too  small  a  quantity  of  pyrogallic  be  poured  on  the  plate,  stains 
develop  themselves  at  the  corner,  and  sometimes  spread  on  to  the  centre ; 
and  nothing  will  remove  them. 

If  the  pyrogallic  acid  developer  does  not  spread  itself  immediately 
across  the  plate,  it  produces  lines  which  are  as  irreparable  as  those  stains 
described  in  the  previous  instance.  It  is  also  very  important  to  main- 
tain a  constant  backward  and  forward  motion  during  development, 
otherwise  a  series  of  little  black  points  of  reduced  silver  will  attach  them- 
selves to  the  plate. 

Hyposulphite  of  soda,  imperfectly  washed  away,  sometimes  agglome- 
rates after  the  lapse  of  a  certain  time,  and  then  produces  star-like  spots 
of  the  form  indicated— fig  68,  page  63.  It  is,  therefore,  of  the  highest 
importance  to  remove  the  hyposulphite  by  repeated  washing. 

It  remains  to  say  a  few  words  on  fogging,  the  origin  of  which  is  two- 
fold— the  first,  diffused  light,  and  the  second,  alkalinity  of  the  bath. 

The  evil  from  the  first  cause  arises  generally  from  the  inferiority  of  the 
yellow  glass,  which  does  not  completely  arrest  the  passage  of  the  actinic 
rays ;  sometimes  from  the  lamp  or  candle  giving  off  too  much  white 
light,  from  a  hole  in  the  camera  back,  or  in  the  camera  itself,  &c. 

The  second  of  these  causes,  alkalinity  of  the  bath,  is  much  more  rare ; 
it  occurs  generally  in  summer  time  when  the  weather  is  very  warm.  A 
few  drops  of  acetic  acid  in  the  nitrate  bath  will  obviate  this  defect. 


NOTE  10  (page  56). 
CRYSTALLISABLE  ACETIC  ACID. 

Where  crystallisable  acetic  acid  cannot  be  obtained,  its  nse  may,  to  a 
certain  extent,  be  dispensed  with,  by  the  following  plan. 

One  thousand  five  hundred  grains  of  caustic  potash  are  dissolved  in 
35  ounces  of  distilled  water,  to  which  is  added  750  grains  of  powdered 
litmus,  and  the  blue  liquid  is  decanted  into  another  bottle.  This  bottle 
should  be  kept  carefully  stoppered.  Having  obtained  some  good  ordi- 
nary acetic  acid,  called  purified  pyroligneous  acid,  and  a  tube  divided  into 
cubic  centimetres,  two  cubic  centimetres  of  the  blue  solution  of  potash 
are  poured  therein.  Now  add,  drop  by  drop,  some  standard  crystal" 
Usable  acid,  becoming  solid  when  exposed  to  a  temperature  of  about 
40°  Fahr. ;  and  after  each  addition,  shake  the  tube.  A  point  will  be 
reached  at  which  the  blue  solution  allot  once  becomes  red ;  it  is  at  this 
moment  that  the  operation  is  completed. 

A  note  is  made  of  the  amount  of  acid  which  was  necessary  to  change 
the  blue  colour  of  the  potass  solution ;  and  suppose,  for  example,  this  to 
have  been  a  quarter  of  a  cubic  centimetre.  Now  begin  afresh,  by  mixing 
the  solution  of  litmus  with  twice  its  volume  of  water,  an  d  also  the  crys- 


132  PHOTOGRAPHIC    PROCESSES. 

tallisable  acid  with  a  similar  proportion.  This  will  allow  the  observa- 
tion to  be  made  more  accurately  as  to  the  quantity  of  acid  required  to 
redden  a  given  quantity  of  solution  of  potash.  Suppose  that  it  is  finally 
ascertained  that  10  cent,  cubes  of  the  blue  solution  require  1  to  1J  cent, 
cube  of  the  crystallisable  acid.  Now  perform  a  similar  operation  with 
the  pyroligneous  acid ;  this  being  much  weaker,  it  will  probably  be  found 
that  for  10  parts  of  the  blue  solution  3  J  parts  of  this  acid  will  be  required. 
The  following  equation  is  now  made.  If  1 J  parts  of  pure  acid  correspond 
to  3  J  parts  of  ordinary  acid,  10  of  pure  acid  will  correspond  to  x. 

From  this  calculation  is  deduced  the  fact,  that  x  is  equal  to  28  ;  from 
which  it  results,  that  every  time  10  grains  of  crystallisable  acid  are 
ordered  in  a  formula,  they  may  be  replaced  by  28  of  ordinary  acid  :  if  5, 
14  only  will  be  necessary ;  if  30,  84  will  be  wanted,  &c.  &c. 

The  hydrometer  cannot  be  used  to  determine  the  strength  of  acetic 
acid,  for  its  density  bears  no  regular  proportion  to  its  saturating  power, 
or,  in  other  words,  to  the  relative  quantities  of  acid  and  water. 

The  pure  crystallisable  acid  solidifies  between  50°  to  60°  Fahr. 
Although  the  ordinary  acid  is  only  a  mixture  of  pure  acid  and  water,  and 
the  first  solidifies  at,  say  56°  Fahr.,  and  the  second  at  32",  it  does  not 
necessarily  follow  that  the  mixture  shall  solidify  above  32°.  The  pure 
acid,  mixed  with  three  times  its  volume  of  water,  should,  at  first  sight, 
solidify  at  about  40°  Fahr.,  but,  in  reality,  it  does  not  congeal  until  it  is 
cooled  to  36°  below  the  freezing  point  of  water;  from  which  it  follows, 
very  weak  acid  cannot  be  purified  by  successive  and  fractional  freezing  ; 
and  it  is  only  when  more  concentrated,  that  this  method  of  purification 
can  be  adopted. 


INDEX. 


Acetate  of  ammonia,  use  of,  86 

Acetic  acid  crystallisable,  130 

Aceto-nitrate  bath  for  sensitising  collodio-albumen  glasses,  78 

Achromatic  lenses,  127 

prisms,  127 

Actinic  rays,  48 
Albumen,  how  prepared,  76 
Albumen  iodised,  75 
Albumen  process,  5 
Albumenised  paper,  101 
Alcohol,  properties  of,  11 
Amber  varnish,  68 
American  clip,  104 

Backgrounds,  graduated,  how  produced,  108 
Bath,  nitrate  of  silver,  for  the  wet  collodion  process,  30,  32,  123 
•  collodio-albumen  process,  73 


Balance,  hand,  21 

Balance,  table,  21 

Brewster's  stereoscope,  90 

Bromide  of  cadmium,  preparation  of,  20 

Bromine,  19 

Cadmium,  19 

Caloscopic  lenses,  47 

Calotype,  the,  2 

"  Cartes  de  Visite,"  camera,  39 

lens  for  taking,  47 

Camera  obscura,  discovery  of,  36 

principle  of  the,  36 

photographic,  37 

bellows-body,  or  portable,  41 

"  Carte  de  Visite,"  39 

for  travelling,  40 

stands,  38 

Cameras,  stereoscopic,  92 


—  positive  collodion  process,  86 

—  printing  process,  103 


134:  INDEX. 

Chloride  of  calcium,  how  employed,  1 05 

gold,  use  of  in  toning,  1 13 

sodium,  use  of  in  positive  printing,  99 

silver,  how  reduced,  75 

Clouds,  effect  of,  how  produced,  110 
Coating  plates  with  collodion,  31 
Collodio-albumen  plates,  development  of,  80 

albumen  process,  73 

Collodion,  6,  17 

film  spots  on  the,  131 

for  copying,  122 

how  decanted,  25 

—  iodised,  preparation  of,  22 

how  preserved,  24 

positives,  how  whitened,  88 

preparation  of,  122 

process,  negative,  30 

positive,  84 

•  dry,  71 


Colours,  separation  of  light  into,  127 

Combination  lenses,  for  portraits  and  groups,  43 

Crystal  enamel,  119 

Cyanide  of  potassium,  use  for  the  positive  collodion  process,  87 

for  removing  stains,  123 

Daguerreotype,  1 

Dark  frame  for  camera,  42 

Dark  room,  29 

Developing  solution  for  collodion  negatives,  56 

positives,  86  ^ 

: collodio-alburnen  plates,  80 

tannin  process,  83 


Dextrine,  72 

Diaphragm,  meaning  of,  37 

Direct  image,  3 

Dry  collodion  processes,  71 

Drying  box  for  sensitised  paper,  105 

Ether,  apparatus  for  distillation  of,  15 
—  properties  of,  13 

rectification  of,  13 

washed,  14 

Exposure,  to  estimate  time  of,  52,  53 

Fading  of  photographs,  to  avoid,  1 1 6 
Fixing  of  positive  paper  proofs,  115 

solution  for  negatives,  64 

. positives,  87 

tannin  process,  84 

Filtering,  apparatus  for,  11 
Filters,  how  made,  11 
Finger-stalls,  36, 


INDEX.  135 

Focus,  how  obtained,  41 
Focussing,  meaning  of,  37 
Fogged  image,  how  rendered,  85 
Fogging,  how  caused,  131,  132 

Gallic  acid,  use  of  with  calotype  process,  2 

collodio-albumen  process,  81 

—  for  rapid  printing,  117 
Gallo  nitrate  of  silver,  3 
Gelatine,  Nelson's  patent,  82 

use  of,  119 

Glass  clipping  troughs,  34 

plates,  edges  of,  how  ground,  25 

how  cleaned,  26 

: dried,  67 

preserved,  43 

room,  48 

colour  of,  50 

Gold,  chloride  of,  use  in  toning,  113 
Gun  cotton,  discovery  of,  18 

-  preparation  of,  16 

Head  rests,  51 
Hyposulphite  of  soda,  64 

Iconometer,  54 

Incident  ray,  124 

Indirect  image,  3 

Intensifying  collodion  negatives,  66 

Iodide  of  cadmium,  preparation  of,  19 

ethylamine,  122 

potassium,  use  of  in  rapid  printing,  117 

Iodine,  19 

Iodised  albumen,  75 

Kaolin,  how  employed,  78 — 104 

Laboratory,  photographic,  29 
Lenses,  achromatic,  127 

caloscopic,  47 

concave,  126 

• convex,  126 

double  or  compound,  45 

-focus  of,  126 

—  orthoscopic,  47 

portrait,  45 

photographic,  43  ' 

various  forms  of,  127 

—  for  views,  how  used,  44 
Litmus  paper,  1 8 

Measures,  glass,  graduated,  21 


136  INDEX. 

Negative  image,  3,  4 


.Negative  image,  3,  4 
Nelson's  patent  gelatine,  82 
Nitrate  of  silver  bath,  30,  32,  123 

preparation  of,  for  negative  process,  123 

—  stains,  to  remove,  123 

use  for  collodio-albumen  process,  73 

use  of  in  negative  collodion  process,  30 

Dositive  collodion  process.  86 


I    llGgttilil.  VG    ^\Jll<JUllUll    plU^^OO,     U\J 

•  positive  collodion  process,  86 


Orthoscopic  lenses,  47 

Paper,  albumenised,  101 

photographic,  99 

salted,  99 

Photographs,  mounting  of,  116 — 118 
Photographic  optics,  124 
Pictures,  formation  of,  by  lenses,  128 
Plate  box,  43 
Plate-holder,  27,  58 
Pneumatic  plate-holder,  58 
Portrait  lenses,  43 
Portraits,  rules  for  taking,  52 
Positive  collodion,  preparation  of,  84 
-  process,  84 


•  image,  3 

—  printing,  rules  for,  107 

—  prints,  mounting  of,  116 — 118 

—  proofs,  fading  of,  to  avoid,  116 

fixing  of,  115 

toning  of,  112' 

varnish  for,  118 


Positives,  collodio-albumen,  79 

transparent  glass,  79 

Pressure  frames  for  printing,  108 
Printing  frame,  106 

process,  98 

the  rapid,  116 

Prisms,  achromatic,  127 

refraction  of,  125 

Protosulphate  of  iron,  use  of,  86 
Pyrogallic  acid,  preparation  of,  129 

use  of,  55 

Pyroxyline,  preparation  of,  6,  17,  122 

Reducing  agents,  55 
Reflection  of  light,  124 
Refraction  of  light,  1 24 

through  prisms,  125 

Rolling  press,  for  glazing  proofs,  118 
Russel's  tannin  process,  82 

Salted  paper,  99 


INDEX.  137 


Sel  d'or,  how  used,  116 

Sensitising  collodionised  plates,  rules  for,  36 

solution,  for  paper,  103 

for  positive  collodion,  86 

Separation  of  collodion  film,  to  avoid,  65 

Soehnee  varnish,  68 

Spots  on  the  collodion  film,  131 

collodion  negatives,  63 

Stains  on  collodion  film,  how  caused,  131 
negatives,  63 


-  of  nitrate  of  silver,  to  remove,  123 


Stereoscope,  phenomena  of  the,  89 

—  Sir  David  Brewster's  refracting,  90 

Wheatstone's  reflecting,  90 

Stereoscopic  angle,  explanation  of,  96 

angles,  table  of,  97 

cameras,  92 

pictures,  how  mounted,  118 

obtained,  93 

Stop,  meaning  of,  37 
Support  for  glass  plates,  26 

Tannin,  from  what  obtained,  82 

process,  82 

Taupenot's  process,  71 
Toning  process,  the,  113 

Varnish,  amber,  68 

for  positive  proofs,  118 

soehnee,  68 

Varnishing  negatives,  67 — 69 

~  positive  collodion  pictures,  88 
View  lenses,  43 

meter,  54 

Views,  rules  for  taking,  53 
Vignette  glasses,  108 

Washing  bottle,  57 

Washing  collodion  negatives,  65 

Wheatstone's  stereoscope,  90 

Yellow  light,  action  of,  48 


James  S.  Virtue,  Printer,  City  Road,  London, 


CATALOGUE 

OF 

gjprate  anir 

MANUFACTURED   AND   SOLD   BY 

HORNE    AND    THOBNTHWAITE, 

121,  122,  &  123,  NEWGATE  STREET, 

LONDON,  E.G. 


LENSES. 

£    s. 

d. 

£ 

s. 

d. 

£ 

s.    d. 

* 

For 

portraits,  4|  by   3J 

0 

16 

Oand 

1 

7 

Oand  3 

13     6 

64         4} 

2 

0 

0 

„ 

2 

17 

6 

„    7 

0     0 

84       64 

5 

0 

0 

„ 

8 

10 

0 

„  15 

15     0 

For  landscapes,  6           5 

1 

15 

0 

— 

— 

7           6 

2 

12 

6 

— 

— 

9          7 

3 

13 

6 

— 

— 

12        10 

5 

5 

0 

— 

— 

„          Stereoscopic 

1 

13 

0 

„ 

2 

0 

0 

»    2 

5     0 

For  Portraits,    ditto 

3 

3 

0 

» 

7 

7 

0 

per  pair. 

CAMERAS. 

£ 

s. 

d. 

£     5. 

d. 

Walnut, 

expanding            . 

from 

0 

11 

6 

to 

1  10 

0 

Maho^aL 

0 

13 

6 

2  12 

6 

Ditto,  best  make 

0 

17 

6 

?> 

5     0 

0 

Ditto, 

folding,  for  views 

3 

0 

0 

J? 

17  12 

6 

Ditto, 

folding  and  expanding 

ditto 

4 

10 

0 

fj 

23    0 

0 

Ditto, 

Stereoscopic 

3 

0 

0 

— 

Ditto, 

ditto,  with  lens 

6 

10 

0 

— 

Ditto, 

ditto,  Binocular 

4 

14 

6 

)} 

9     9 

0 

Ditto, 

ditto,  Powell's 

7 

7 

0 

t) 

9     9 

0 

Ditto, 

Schaw's  Landscape 

5 

5 

0 

» 

7    7 

0 

BATHS, 

£ 

t.   d. 

n 

d. 

Gutta  Percha 

from 

0 

2 

8 

to 

1     2 

6 

Ditto,     water-tight 

. 

0 

7 

6 

„ 

1  16 

0 

Solid  glass 

0 

6 

0 

„ 

1   15 

0 

Ditto,  water-tight 

. 

1 

1 

0 

„ 

2  17 

6 

Porcelain 

0 

3 

6 

}) 

0  14 

0 

Ditto  Well  Baths 

. 

0 

3 

0 

n 

0     8 

6 

GLASS  PLATES  FOR  THE  COLLODION  PROCESS. 

BEST    CROWN,    EXTRA    WHITE    SHEET,    PURPLE,    OPAL, 
AND    BEST   PATENT   PLATE. 

For  Prices  and  Sizes  see  detailed  Catalogue,  to  be  had  on  application,  or 
by  sending  Stamp  and  Address  to  122,  Newgate  Street,  London,  E.G. 


NIELLO    PAPER. 

VIGNETTE   PLATES. 


GROOVED  PLATE  BOXES  FOR  GLASS  PLATES, 

DEAL,  MAHOGANY,  AND  ZINC. 


Gutta  Percha  Trays,  Well  Baths,  and  Washing  Trays. 
PORCELAIN  WASHING  PANS, 

From  5  by  4,     9^.    to     24  by  19,     £1  1*. 

Home  &  Thornthwaite's  Photographic  Colours, 

Iii  boxes,  7  colours,  7*.  §d. ;  14  colours,  10s.  6^.j  21  colours,  13s, 
Separate  colours,  Qd.  each. 


CAMERA  STANDS. 

For  Landscapes,  10$.  6^.to£l  11*.  M. ;  for  the  Studio,  £1  Is.  to  £3  13*.  6^. 

HEAD  RESTS. 

In  Wood  and  Metal,  2*.,  5s.,  and  10s.  Qd.    In  Metal,  ,£1  10s.  and  £3  3s. 


STILLS,  WITH  REFRIGERATORS. 

Tin,  1  gal.  21*.;  2  gal.  £1  7*.  6^.— Copper,  1  gal.  £1  18*.;  2  gal.  £2  14*. 


STEREOSCOPIC  PICTURES, 

BRITISH  AND  FOREIGN,  ON  GLASS  AND  PAPER. 


STEREOSCOPES, 

BREWSTER'S  REFRACTING  &  WHEATSTONE'S   REFLECTING. 

HORNE  &  THORNTHWAITE,  121,  122,  &  123,  NEWGATE  STREET. 


BACKGROUNDS  FOE  THE  OPERATING  ROOM, 

£1  30s.  to  £2  5s. 


BRUSHES. 

STIRRING  RODS. 

FUNNELS. 

SCALES   AND   WEIGHTS. 

MEASURES. 

FILTERS. 

GLASS   PESTLES   AND   MORTARS. 


VIEW   METERS. 
FOCUSSING   EYE   PIECES. 
SPIRIT   LAMPS. 
CIRCULAR    LEVELS. 
GLASS   CARBOYS. 
PREPARING   BOARDS. 
YELLOW   GLASS   LANTERNS. 


GRADUATED  COLLODION  BOTTLES,  frcm  2s.  to  3s. 
COLLODION  FILTERERS  OR  POURERS,  6s.  Qd.  each. 


levelling  Stands,  2s.  6d.,  4s,,  6s. 

PRESSURE  FRAMES, 

6  by  5,    5s.  M.  each.         23  by  21,    JB1  18s.  6^. 

HASKIN'S  IMPROVED  PRESSURE  FRAMES, 

From  18s.  to  JB4  10s.  per  dozen. 


MOULDED  GLASS  DISHES. 
CARDBOARD   FOR   CARTES   DE 

VISITE. 

STEREOSCOPIC   MOUNTS. 
FOCUSSING   CLOTHS. 


PHOTOGRAPHIC  PINS. 
AMERICAN   CLIPS. 
BATH   TESTERS. 
PLATE   HOLDERS. 


DR,  MORRIS'S  DRY  COLLODION  PLATES. 

LEAKE'S    PHOTOGRAPHIC   TENT. 


PHOTOGRAPHIC  PAPERS. 


Papier  Saxe. 

Papier  Reve. 

Papier  Josef. 

Whatman's. 

Towgood's. 

Holingsworth's  thin. 

Balston's. 

Turner's. 

Home  &  Thornthwaite's  waxed. 


Home   &   Thornthwaite's  waxed 
iodised. 

Ditto  ditto,  sensitive. 

White  filtering. 
Dead  black. 
Iodised. 
Salted. 
Albumenised. 


HOUSE  &  THORNTHWAITE,  121,  122,  &  123,  NEWGATE  STREET. 


4 

ESTIMATES    FOR    COMPLETE    SETS    OF 
PHOTOGRAPHIC    APPARATUS. 


HORN  FORCEPS. 
SILVER   PINS. 
SILVER   WIRE    HOOKS. 
DROPPING  BOTTLES. 


WASH   BOTTLES. 
DEVELOPING   GLASSES. 
PLATE    DRAINERS. 
SYPHON  WASHING  PANS. 


ROLLING  PRESSES, 

From  £1  10s.    to    £12  125. 


ROMALEIAN  FRAMES. 

PASSE   PARTOUTS. 

FRAMES   FOR   PASSE   PARTOUTS. 

ENGLISH  AND  AMERICAN  MOROCCO 

CASES. 


MOROCCO  FRAMES. 
UNION   TRAYS. 
GILT   MATS. 
GILT   PRESERVERS. 
CARDBOARD   MOUNTS. 


ABSOLUTELY  PUKE  CHEMICALS. 


POSITIVE    COLLODION. 
NEGATIVE    DITTO. 

ACKLAND'S  DITTO. 
FOTHERGILL'S  DITTO, 

CRYSTAL   VARNISH. 

NITRATE  OF  SILVEE  BATH. 


NEGATIVE  VARNISH. 
SOEHNEE  DITTO. 
CHLOROFORM  DITTO. 
BLACK  (BATES')  DITTO. 
PLATE-CLEANING  SOLUTION. 


BROMO-IODISED   COLLODION. 

DEVELOPING  SOLUTION. 

NEW  PORTRAIT  COLLODION. 


White  and  Green  Glass  Bottles— Plain  and  Stoppered. 


ILLUSTEATED  AND  DETAILED  PEICED  CATALOGUE 

by  post  on  receipt  of  one  Postage  Staftip, 


HORNE  &  THORNTHWAITE,  121,  122,  &  123,  NEWGATE  STREET. 


CATALOGUE 

OF 

RUDIMENTARY,  SCIENTIFIC,  EDUCATIONAL,  AND 
CLASSICAL  WORKS, 

FOR  COLLEGES,  HIGH  AND  ORDINARY  SCHOOLS, 
AND  SELF-INSTRUCTION  5 

ALSO  FOB 

MECHANICS'   INSTITUTIONS,   FEEE  LIBEAEIES,  &c.  &c., 

PUBLISHED  BY 

VIRTUE  BROTHERS  &  CO.,  1,  AMEN  CORNER, 
PATERNOSTER  ROW. 


•»*   THE    ENTIRE    SERIES    IS    FREELY    ILLUSTRATED    ON    WOOD 
AND    STONE   WHERE    REQUISITE. 

The  Public  are  respectfully  informed  that  the  whole  of 
MR.  WEALE'S  Publications,  contained  in  the  present  Catalogue, 
have  been  Purchased  by  VIRTUE  BROTHERS  &  Co.,  and  that  all 
future  Orders  will  be  supplied  by  them  at  the  above  address. 

*$*   Several  additional  Volumes,  by  Popular  Authors,  are   in 
preparation,  and  will  shortly  be  ready  for  delivery. 

RUDIMENTARY    SERIES. 

2.  NATURAL  PHILOSOPHY,  by  Charles  Tomlinson  .        .     Is. 

3.  GEOLOGY,  by  Major-Gen.  Portlock,  F.R.S.,  &c.       .       1*.  6rf. 
6.  MECHANICS,  by  Charles  Tomlinson  .     Is. 

12.  PNEUMATICS,  by  Charles  Tomlinson  .     Is. 

20,  21.  PERSPECTIVE,  by  George  Pyne,  2  vols.  in  1      .        .     2s. 
27,  28.  PAINTING,    The    Art  of ;    or,  A  GRAMMAR  OF 

COLOURING,  by  George  Field,  2  vols.  in  1  .  25. 

36,  37,  38,  39.  DICTIONARY  of  the  TECHNICAL  TERMS 

used  by  Architects,  Builders,  Engineers,  Surveyors,  &c., 

4  vols.  in  1 45. 

In  cloth  boards,  5s. ;  half  morocco,  6s. 
40.  GLASS   STAINING,    by   Dr.   M.  A.  Gessert,   With  an 

Appendix  on  the  Art  of  Enamelling        .        .        .        .Is. 


2  SCIENTIFIC  AND  MECHANICAL  WORKS. 

41.  PAINTING   ON    GLASS,    from  the  German  of  Emanuel 

O.  Fromberg Is, 

69,  70.  MUSIC,  a  Practical  Treatise,  by  C.  C.  Spencer,  Doctor 

of  Music,  2  vols.  in  1 2s. 

71.  THE  PIANOFORTE,  Instructions  for  Playing,  by  C.  C. 

Spencer,  Doctor  of  Music       ......     Is. 

72  to  75*  RECENT  FOSSIL  SHELLS  (A  Manual  of  the 
Mollusca),  by  Samuel  P.  Woodward,  4  TO!S.  in  1,  and 

Supplement 5s.  Qd. 

In  cloth  boards,  6s.  M,. ;  half  morocco,  7s.  6d. 

83.  BOOK-KEEPING,  by  James  Haddon,  M.A.      .        .        .     Is. 

84.  ARITHMETIC,  with  numerous    Examples,  by  Professor 

J.R.  Young Is.  Grf. 

84*.  KEY  TO  THE  PRECEDING  VOLUME,  by  Professor 

J.  R.  Young Is.  £d. 

96.  ASTRONOMY,  POPULAR,  by  the  Rev.  Robert  Main, 

M.R.A.S.  : Is. 

101*.  WEIGHTS  AND  MEASURES  OF  ALL  NATIONS-, 
Weights  of  Coins,  and  Divisions  of  Time ;  with  the 
Principles  which  determine  the  Rate  of  Exchange,  bv 
Mr.  Woolhouse,  F.R.A.S is.  Gd. 

103.  INTEGRAL  CALCULUS,  Examples  of,  by  Prof.  J.  Hann     Is. 

112.  DOMESTIC  MEDICINE,  for  the  Preservation  of  Health, 

by  M.  Raspail Is.  (id. 

131.  MILLER'S,  FARMER'S,  AND  MERCHANT'S  READY- 
RECKONER,  showing  the  Value  of  any  Quantity  of 
Corn,  with  the  Approximate  Value  of  Mill-stones  and 
M'&Work 1*. 

{In  Preparation.) 
PHOTOGRAPHY.    A  New  Manual. 


PHYSICAL  SCIENCE. 

1.  CHEMISTRY,   by    Professor   Fownes,   F.R.S.,   including 

Agricultural  Chemistry,  for  the  use  of  Farmers       .         .     Is. 
4,  5.  MINERALOGY,  with  a  Treatise  on  Mineral   Rocks  or 

A  ggregates,  by  James  Dana,,  A.M.,  2  vols.  in  1         .        .     25. 

7.  ELECTRICITY,  an  Exposition  of  the  General  Principles  of 

the  Science,  by  Sir  William  Snow  Harris,  F.R.S.  Is.  Qd. 

7*.  GALVANISM,'  ANIMAL  AND  VOLTAIC  ELECTRI- 
CITY; A  Treatise  on  the  General  Principles  of  Gal- 
vanic Science,  by  Sir  William  Snow  Harris,  F.R.S.  Is.  6d. 

8,  9,  10.  MAGNETISM,  Concise  Exposition  of   the  General 

Principles  of  Magnetical   Science  and  the  Purposes  to 
which  it  has  been  Applied,  by  the  same,  3  vols.  in  1       3s.  Qd. 

VIRTUE  BROTHERS  &  CO.,  1,  AMEN  CORKER. 


SCIENTIFIC  AND  MECHANICAL  WORKS.  3 

11,  11*.  ELECTEIC  TELEGEAPH,  History  of,  by  E.  High- 
ton,  C.E 2s. 

133.  METALLUEGY  OF  COPPEE,  by  E.  H.  Lamborn         .  25. 

134.  METALLUEGY    OF  SILYEE  AND   LEAD,   by   Dr. 

E.  H.  Lamborn 25. 

135.  ELECTEO-METALLUEGY,  by  Alex.  Watt,  F.E.S.S.A.  Is.  Qd. 
138.  HANDBOOK  OF  THE  TELEGEAPH,  by  E.  Bond     .  Is. 
143.  EXPERIMENTAL  ESSAYS— On  the  Motion  of  Cam- 
phor, and  Modern  Theory  of  Dew,  by  C.  Tomlinson       .  Is* 


BUILDING  AND  ARCHITECTURE. 

16.  OEDEES    OF  AECHITECTUEE,   and    their  JEsthetic 

Principles,  by  W.  H.  Leeds Is, 

17.  STYLES  OF  AECHITECTUEE,  by  T.  Bury   .        .       Is.  0>d. 

18.  19.  AECHITECTUEE,  Principles  of  Design  in,  by  E.  L. 

Garbett,  2  vols  in  1 2s, 

22.  BUILDING,   the    Art  of,  in  Five  Sections,  by  Edward 

Dobson,  C.E Is. 

23,  24.  BEICK  AND  TILE  MAKING,  by  E.  Dobson,  C.E., 

2  vols.  in  1 2s. 

25,  26.  MASONEY  AND  STONE-CUTTING,  with  the  Prin- 
ciples of  Masonic  Projection  Concisely  Explained,  by 
E.  Dobson,  C.E.,  2  vols.  in  1 2s. 

30.  DEAINING  and  SEWAGE  OF  TOWNS  and  BUILD- 
INGS, Suggestive  of  Sanatory  Eegulations,  by  G.  D. 

Dcmpsey,  C.E Is.  Qd. 

(With  No.  29,  DRAINAGE  OF  LAND,  2  vols.  in  1,  2s.  Qd.) 

35.  BLASTING  EOCKS,  QUAEEYING,  AND  THE  QUA- 
LITIES OF  STONE,  by  Lieut. -Gen.  Sir  J.  Burgoyne, 
Bart.,  G.C.B.,  E.E l.s.  Qd. 

42.  COTTAGE    BUILDING,    or    Hints   for   Improving  the 

Dwellings  of  the  Labouring  Classes         .         .         .         .Is. 

44.  FOUNDATIONS  AND  CONCEETE  WOEKS,  A  Treatise 

on,  by  E.  Dobson,  C.E Is. 

45.  LIMES,   CEMENTS,   MOETAES,   CONCEETE,   MAS- 

TICS, &c.,  by  G.  E,  Burnell,  C.E Is 

57,  58.  WAEMING  AND  VENTILATION,  by  Charles  Tom- 

linson,  2  vols.  in  1 2s. 

Ill  ARCHES,  PIEES,  A^D  BUTTRESSES,  the  Principles 

of  their  Construction,  by  William  Bland  .  .  Is.  6<£* 
116.  ACOUSTICS ;  Distribution  of  Sound,  by  T.  Eoger  Smith. 

Architect Is.  Gd. 

123.  CAEPENTEY  AND  JOINEEY,  a  Treatise  founded  on 

Dr.  Eobison's  Work Is.  6^. 

123*.  ILLUSTEATIVE  PLATES  to  the  preceding  .  .  4s.  Gd. 

VIRTUE  BROTHERS  &  CO.,  1,  AMEN  CORNER. 


4  SCIENTIFIC  AND  MECHANICAL  WOEKS. 

124.  ROOFS  FOR  PUBLIC  AND  PEIVATE  BUILDINGS, 

founded  on  Dr.  Robison's  Work  .  .  .  .15.  Gd. 

124*.  IRON  ROOFS  of  Recent  Construction  —  a  Series  of 

Descriptive  Plates 4s.  Gd. 

127.  ARCHITECTURAL  MODELLING,   Practical  Instruc- 

tions in  the  Art Is.  Gd. 

128,  129.    VITRUVIUS    ON    CIVIL,    MILITARY,    AND 

NAVAL  ARCHITECTURE,  translated  by  Joseph  Gwilt, 
Architect,  with  Illustrative  Plates,  by  the  Author  and 
Joseph  Gandy,  2  vols.  in  1 5s. 

130.  GRECIAN  ARCHITECTURE,  Principles  of  Beauty  in, 

by  the  Earl  of  Aberdeen Is. 

132.  ERECTION  OF  DWELLING-HOUSES,  with  Specifica- 
tions, Quantities  of  Materials,  &c.,  by  S.  H.  Brooks, 
27  Plates 2*.  Gd. 


MACHINERY    AND    ENGINEERING. 

33.  CRANES  AND  MACHINERY  FOR  LIFTING  HEAVY 

WEIGHTS,  the  Art  of  Constructing,  by  Joseph  Glynn, 
C.E Is. 

34.  STEAM  ENGINE,  by  Dr.  Lardner Is. 

43.  TUBULAR  AND  OTHER  IRON  GIRDER  BRIDGES, 

including  the  Britannia  and  Conway  Bridges,  by  G.  D. 
Dempsey Is. 

47,  48,  49.  LIGHTHOUSES,  their  Construction  and  Illumina- 
tion, by  Allan  Stevenson,  C.E.,  3  vols.  in  1  .  .3s. 

59.  STEAM  BOILERS,  their  Construction  and  Management, 

by  R.  Armstrong,  C.E. Is. 

62.  RAILWAYS,  Principles  of  Construction,  by  Sir  E.  Stephen- 
son  !«?.  Gd. 

62*  RAILWAY  WORKING  IN  GREAT  BRITAIN  AN"D 
IRELAND,  Statistics,  Revenue,  Accounts,  &c.,  by  E.  D. 

Chattaway Is. 

(Vols.  62  and  62*  bound  in  1,  2s.  Gd.) 

67,  68.  CLOCK  AND  WATCH  MAKING,  including  Church 
Clocks  and  Bells,  by  Edmund  Beckett  Dcnison,  M.A., 
with  an  Appendix,  2  vols.  in  1  .  .  .  .  3s.  Gd. 

78,  79.  STEAM  AND  LOCOMOTION,  on  the  Principle  of 
connecting  Science  with  Practice,  by  John  Sewell,  L.E. 
2  vols.  in  1 2s. 

78*.  LOCOMOTIVE  ENGINES,  a  Treatise  on,  by  G.  Drysdale 

Dempsey,  C.E Is.  Gd. 

79*.  ILLUSTRATIONS  TO  THE  ABOVE  .   .   .   -Is.  Gd. 

VIRTUE  BROTHERS  &  CO.,  1,  AMEN  CORNER, 


SCIENTIFIC  AND  MECHANICAL  WORKS.' 


98,  98*.  MECHANISM  AND  THE  CONSTRUCTION  OF 
MACHINES,  by  Thomas  Baker,  C.E.;  and  TOOLS  AND 
MACHINES,  by  J.  Nasmyth,  C.E.,  with  220  Woodcuts  2s.  Gd. 

114.  MACHINERY,  its  Construction  and  Working,  by  C.  D. 

Abel,C.E Is.Gd. 

115.  ILLUSTRATIVE  PLATES  TO  THE  ABOVE,  4to.       7s.  Qd. 
139.  THEORY  OF  THE  STEAM  ENGINE,  by  T.  Baker,  C.E.     Is. 


CIVIL  ENGINEERING,  &c. 

13,  14,  15,  15*.  CIVIL    ENGINEERING,   by    Henry    Law, 

3  vols. ;  with  Supplement  by  G.  R.  Burnell,  4  vols.  in  1    4s.  £>d. 

29.  DRAINING  DISTRICTS  AND  LANDS,  the  Art  of,  by 

G.  D.  Dempsey,  C.E Is. 

(With  No.  30,  DRAINAGE  AND  SEWAGE  or  TOWNS,  2  vols.  in  1, 2s.  Gd.) 

31.  WELL-SINKING  AND  BORING,  by  John  G.  Swindell, 

revised  by  G.  R.  Burnell,  C.E Is 

46.  ROAD-MAKING,  the  Construction  and  Repair,  by  S,  C. 
Hughes  and  H.  La\v,  C.E.,  and  Gen.  Sir  J.  Burgoyne, 
Bart.,  G.C.B.,  R.E. Is.  Qd. 

60,  61.  LAND  AND  ENGINEERING  SURVEYING,  by  T. 

Baker,  C.E.,  2  vols.  in  1 2s, 

63,  64,  65.  AGRICULTURAL  BUILDINGS,  FIELD  EN- 
GINES, MACHINERY,  and  IMPLEMENTS,  by  G.  H. 
Andrews.  3  vols.  in  1 3s. 

66.  CLAY  LANDS  AND  LOAMY  SOILS,  by  Professor  Do- 
naldson, A.E. Is. 

77*.  ECONOMY  OF  FUEL,  by  T.  S.  Prideaux      .        .        .Is. 

80*,  81*.  EMBANKING  LANDS  FROM  THE  SEA,  with 
Examples  of  actual  Embankments  and  Sea  Walls,  by 
John  Wiggins,  F.G.S.,  2  vols.  in  1  ....  2-?, 

82,  82*.  POWER  OF  WATER,  as  applied  to  the  Driving  of 
Mills,  and  Giving  Motion  to  Turbines,  and  other  Hy- 
drostatic Machines,  by  Joseph  Glynn,  F.R.S.,  C.E.  .  25.. 

82**,  83*,  83  bis.  COAL  GAS,  its  Manufacture  and  Distribu- 
tion, by  Samuel  Hughes,  C.E. 3s. 

82***.  WATER-WORKS  FOR  THE  SUPPLYr  OF  CITIES 

AJTO  TOWNS,  by  Samuel  Hughes,  C.E.         .         .         .     3*. 

117.  SUBTERRANEOUS  SURVEYING,  &  RANGING  THE 

LINE  without  the  Magnet,  by  T.  Fenwick,  Coal  Viewer, 
with  Improvements  and  Additions  by  T.  Baker,  C.E.     2n.  Gd. 

118,  119.  CIVIL  ENGINEERING  IN  NORTH  AMERICA, 

by  D.  Stevenson,  C.E.,  2  vols.  in  1  ....  3s. 

120.  HYDRAULIC  ENGINEERING,  by  G.R,  Burnell,  C.E., 

2  vols.  in  1  .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .  3s. 

140.  OUTLINES  OF  MODERN  FARMING,by  R.  Scott  Burn  2s, 

VIRTUE  BROTHERS  &  CO.,  1,  AMEN  CORNER. 


6  SCIENTIFIC  AND  MECHANICAL  WORKS. 

121,  122.  EIVEES  AND  TOEEENTS,  from  the  Italian  of 
Paul  Frisi,  and  a  Treatise  on  NAVIGABLE  CANALS, 
AND  EIVEES  THAT  CAEEY  SAND  AND  MUD  2s.  6d. 

125,  126.  COMBUSTION  OF  COAL,  AND  THE  PEEVEN- 

TION  OF  SMOKE,  by  Charles  Wye  Williams,  M.I.C.E.  3s. 


SHIP-BUILDING  AND  NAVIGATION. 

51,  52,  63.  NAVAL  ARCHITECTURE,  Principles  of  the 
Science,  and  their  Practical  Application  to  Naval  Con- 
struction, by  J.  Peake,  N.A.,  3  vols.  in  1  .  .  .  3s. 

53*.  SHIPS  AND  BOATS  FOE  OCEAN  AND  EIVEE 
SEEVICE,  the  Principles  of  Construction,  by  Captain 
H.  A.  Soinmerfeldt Is. 

53**.  ATLAS  OF  14  PLATES  TO  THE  PEECEDING, 

Drawn  to  a  Scale  for  Practice  ...  7s.  Qd. 

54.  MASTING,  MAST-MAKING,  andEIGGINO  OF  SHIPS, 

by  B.  Kipping,  N.A Is.  Qd. 

54*.  IEON  SHIP-BUILDING,  by  John  Grantham,  C.E.       25.  6d. 

54**.  ATLAS  OF  24  PLATES  to  the  preceding  Volume     225.  Qd. 

80,  81.  MAEINE  ENGINES  AND  THE  SCEEW,  by  E. 

Murray,  C.E.,  2  vols.  in  1 2s.  Qd. 

83  bis.  SHIPS  AND  BOATS,  the  Principles  of  Construction, 

byW.  Bland,  of  Hartlip Is 

106.  SHIPS'  ANCHOES  FOE  ALL  SEEVICES,  by  George 

Cotsell,  N.A Is.Qd 


ARITHMETIC  AND    MATHEMATICS. 

32.  MATHEMATICAL  INSTRUMENTS,  AND  THEIE 

USE,  by  J.  F.  Heather,  M.A Is. 

55,  56.  NAVIGATION ;  the  Sailor's  Sea  Book :  How  to  Keep 
the  Log  and  Work  it  off,  &c. ;  Law  of  Storms,  and  Expla- 
nation of  Terms 25. 

61*.  EEADY  EECKONEE  for  the  Measurement  of  Land,  its 
Valuation,  and  the  Price  of  Labour,  by  A.  Arnian, 
Schoolmaster Is.  Gd. 

76,  77.  GEOMETRY,  DESCEIPTIVE,  with  a  Theory  of  Sha- 
dows and  Perspective,  and  a  Description  of  the  Principles 
and  Practice  of  Isometrical  Projection,  by  J.  F.  Heather, 
M.A.,  2  vols.  in  1 2s. 

85.  EQUATIONAL  AEITHMETIC :  Questions  of  Interest, 

Annuities,  &c.,  by  W.  Hipsley Is. 

85*.  EQUATIONAL  AEITHMETIC:  Tables  for  the  Calculation 
of  Si/nple  Interest,  with  Logarithms  for  Compound  Inte- 
rest, and  Annuities,  by  W.  Hipsley  .  .  .  .Is. 

VIRTUE  BROTHERS  &  CO.,  I,  AMEN  CORNER. 


SCIENTIFIC  AND  MECHANICAL  WORKS.  7 

86,  87.  ALGEBEA,  by  James  Haddon,  M.A.,  2  vols.  in  1  .  2s. 
86*,  87*.  ELEMENTS  OF  ALGEBRA,  Key  to  the,  by  Prof. 

Young Is.  Qd. 

88,  89.  GEOMETRY,  Principles  of,  by  Henry  Law,  C.E., 

2  vols.  in  1 2  . 

90.  GEOMETRY,  ANALYTICAL,  by  James  Hann         .        .     Is. 

91,  92.  PLANE  AND  SPHERICAL  TRIGONOMETRY,  by 

Prof.  James  Hann,  2  vols.  in  1  (The  two  divisions  sepa- 
rately, Is.  each) 2,9. 

93.  MENSURATION,  by  T.  Baker,  C.E Is. 

94,  95.    LOGARITHMS,  Tables    of ;   with  Tables  of  Natural 

Sines,  Co-sines,  and  Tangents,  by  H.  Law,  C.E.,  2  vols.  inl  2s.  Gd. 
97.  STATICS  AND  DYNAMICS,  by  T.  Baker,  C.E.  .  .  Is. 
99,  100.  NAVIGATION  AND  NAUTICAL  ASTRONOMY, 

by  Professor  Young,  2  vols.  in  1 2?. 

100*  NAVIGATION  TABLES,  compiled  for  Practical  Use 

with  the  preceding  volume Is.  Gd. 

101.  DIFFERENTIAL  CALCULUS,  by  Mr  AVoolhouse,  F.R.A.S.  Is. 

102.  INTEGRAL  CALCULUS,  by  H.  Cox,  M.A.     .        .        .     Is. 

104.  DIFFERENTIAL    CALCULUS,    Examples    of,    by  J. 

Haddon,  M.A Is. 

105.  ALGEBRA,  GEOMETRY,  and  TRIGONOMETRY,  First 

Mnenionical  Lessons  in,  by  the  Rev.  T.  P.  Turkman,  M.A.  Is.  Qd. 

136.  RUDIMENTARY   ARITHMETIC,  by   James  Haddon, 

M.A.,  with  Additions  by  A.  Annan         .         .         .       Is.  Qd. 

137.  KEY  TO  THE  ABOVE,  containing  Answers  to  all  the 

Questions  in  that  Work,  by  A.  Arman         .         .       Is.  Qd. 


MISCELLANEOUS. 

50.  LAW  OF  CONTRACTS  FOR  WORKS  AND  SERVICES, 

by  David  Gibbons,  S.P. Is. 

107.  METROPOLITAN  BUILDINGS  ACT,  and  THE  ME- 

TROPOLITAN   ACT    FOR    REGULATING    THE 
SUPPLY  OF  GAS,  with  Notes     ....       2s.  Gd. 

108.  METROPOLITAN  LOCAL  MANAGEMENT  ACTS  Is.  3d. 
108*.  METROPOLIS   LOCAL    MANAGEMENT  AMEND- 

M1£NT  ACT,  1802 ;  with  Notes  and  Index  .         .        .Is. 
110.  RECENT  LEGISLATIVE  ACTS  applying  to  Contractors, 

Merchants,  and  Tradesmen      .         .         .         .  Is. 

109.  NUISANCES  REMOVAL  AND  DISEASE  PREVEN- 

TION ACT  Is 

113.  USE  OF  FIELD 'ARTILLERY  '  ON  '  SERVICE,  by 

Lieut.-Col.  Hamilton  Maxwell,  B.A.       ...        Is.  bd. 
113*.  MEMOIR  ON  SWORDS,  bv  the  same  .         .         .Is. 

83**.  CONSTRUCTION  OF  DOOR  LOCKS        .        .       Is.  Qd. 

VIRTUE  BROTHERS  &  CO.,  1,  AMEN  CORNER. 


NEW  SEEIES  OP  EDUCATIONAL  WORKS, 


\TJiis  Series  is  Jcevt  in  three  styles  of  binding — the  prices  of  each 
are  given  in  columns  at  the  end  of  the  lines.'] 


HISTORIES;  GHAMMAH8;  AND  DICTION  ARIES. 

& 

G 

3 

fi? 
s| 

0 

*M     S-1 

ll 

rt 

1,  2,  3,  4.  CONSTITUTIONAL  HISTOEY  OP 

England,  by  W.  D.  Hamilton   . 
5,  6.  OUTLINES    OF    THE   HISTOEY    OF 
Greece,  by  E.  Levien,  M.A.,  2  TO!S.  in  1     . 
7,  8.  OUTLINES    OF   THE    HISTOEY    OF 
Eome,  by  the  same,  2  vols.  in  1 
9,  10.    CHEONOLOGY     OF     CIVIL     AND 
Ecclesiastical  History,  Literature,  Art,  and 
Civilization,  from  the  earliest  period  to  the 
present,  2  vols.  in  1  
11.   GEAMMAE  OF   THE  ENGLISH  LAN- 
GUAGE, bv  Hyde  Clarke,  D.C.L. 
11*.    HAND-BOOK      OF      COMPAEATIYE 
Philology,  by  the  same      .... 
12,  13.   DICTIONAEY   OF   THE   ENGLISH 
Language.  —  A  new  Dictionary  of  the  Eng- 
lish Tongue,  as  spoken  and  written  ;  above 
100,000  words,  or  50,000  more  than  in  any 
existing  work,  by  the  same,  3  vols.  in  1     ". 

s.d. 
4  0 
2  G 
2  G 

2  6 
1  0 
1  0 

3  6 
1  0 
2  0 

2  0 

1  0 
2  0 
1  G 

10 

s.d. 
5  0 
3  6 
3  G 

3  G 

4  6 

5  G 

5  0 
6  0 

4  G 
5  G 

s.d, 
5  6 
4  0 
4  0 

4  0 

5  0 
6  0 

">  ft 
()  0 

5  0- 
G  0 

14.  GEAMMAE    OF    THE    GREEK    LAN- 
GUAGE, by  H.  C.  Hamilton 
15,  16.  DICTIONAEY  OF  THE  GREEK  AND 

English  Languages,  by  II.  E.  Hamilton, 
2  vols.  in  1 
17,  18.   DICTIONAEY   OF  THE   ENGLISH 
and  Greek  Languages,  by  tho  same,  2  vols. 
in  1  .         .         .         .     "   . 
GREEK     1ND    E^HL^SII 

and  English  and  Greek,  4  vols.  in  1  . 

19.  GEAMMAE  OF  THE  LATIN  LANGUAGE, 
by  the  Eev.  T.  Goodwin,  A.B.  . 
20,  21.  DICTIONAEY  OF  THE  LATIN  AND 

English  Languages,  bv  the  same.     Vol.  I. 
22,  23.   DICTIONAEY   OF  THE   ENGLISH 

and  Latin  Languages,  by  the  same.  Yol.  II. 

O  Y01E    jn   I 

24.  GEAMMAE   OF   THE   FRENCH    LAN- 
GUAGE, by  the  Lecturer  at  Ec'sai^on  . 

VIRTUE  BROTHERS  &  CO.,  1,  AMKX  CORNEtt. 


NEW  SERIES  OF  EDUCATIONAL  WORKS. 


HISTORIES,  GRAMMARS,  AND  DICTIONARIES. 

d 
G 

3 

Cloth 
Boards. 

Half 
Morocco. 

25.  DICTIONARY  OF  THE  FRENCH  AND 
English  Languages,  by  A.  Elwes.    Vol.  I. 
20.  DICTIONARY  OF  THE  ENGLISH  AND 

French  Languages,  by  the  same.    Vol.  II. 

s.d. 
1  0 
1  6 

1  0 
20 
20 
20 

1  0 
4  0 

1  0 

1  0 

3  0 

7  0 
3  0 
1  0 

s.  d. 

3  6 
4  6 

7  6 
8  6 

5  0 
6  0 

4  0 
5  0 

12  0 
1  6 

S.d. 

40 
50 

8  6 
9  6 

5  6 
66 

4  6 
5  6 

4/\ 

'  ~T'rh  fh    "F     *  1   r 

27.  GRAMMAR   OF   THE    ITALIAN    LAN- 
GUAGE, by  the  same    
28,  29.   DICTIONARY  OF  THE    ITALIAN, 
English,  and  French   Languages,  by  the 
same.     Vol.  I.  
30,  31.  DICTIONARY   OF  THE  ENGLISH, 
Italian,   and   French    Languages,   by  the 
same.     Vol.  II.          
32,  33.   DICTIONARY   OF  THE   FRENCH, 
Italian,  and   English  Languages,   by  the 
same.    Vol.  Ill  

'     'th  th    Tt  T*      f1" 

34.  GRAMMAR   OF   THE  SPANISH   LAN- 
GUAGE, by  the  same    
35,  36,   37,   38.    DICTIONARY     OF     THE 
Spanish  and  English  Languages,  by  the 
same,  4  vols.  in  1       

39.  GRAMMAR   OF  THE  PGERMANm  LAN- 
GUAGE, by  the  Lecturer  at  JBesancon  . 
40.  CLASSICAL   GERMAN   READER,    from 
the  best  authors,  by  the  same     . 
41,42,43.  DICTIONARIES  OF  THE  ENGLISH, 
German,  and  French  Languages,  by  N.  E. 
Hamilton,  3  vols.,  separately  Is.  each 

44,  45.  DICTIONARY   OF    THE   HEBREW 

and   English   Languages,    containing   the 
Biblical    and    Rabbinical  words,    2  yols. 
(together  with  the  Grammar,  which  may 
be  had  separately  for  Is.)  by  Dr.  BRESSLAU, 
Hebrew  Professor      
46.  'DICTIONARY  OF  THE  ENGLISH  AND 
Hebrew  Languages.   Vol.  III.  to  complete, 
>    by  the  same       

O  irWlr.     oa  O 

47.    FRENCH    AND     ENGLISH     PHRASE 
Book         ...                . 

u 

VIRTUE  BROTHERS  &  CO.,  1,  AMEN  CORNER. 


GREEK  AND  LATIN  CLASSICS* 


Now  in  the  course  of  Publication. 

GREEK  AND  LATIN  CLASSICS. 

A  Series  of  Volumes  containing  the  principal  Greek  and  Latin  Authors,  accoa> 
panied  by  Explanatory  Notes  in  English,  principally  selected  from  the  best  and, 
most  recent  G-erman  Commentators,  and  comprising  all  those  Works  that  arft 
essential  for  the  Scholar  and  the  Pupil,  and  applicable  for  the  Universities  of 
Oxford,  Cambridge,  Edinburgh,  Glasgow,  Aberdeen,  and  Dublin ;  the  Colleges  at 
Belfast,  Cork,  Galway,  Winchester,  and  Eton ;  and  the  great  Schools  at  Harrow, 
Rugby,  &c. — also  for  Private  Tuition  and  Instruction,  and  for  the  Library. 


LATIN    SERIES. 

1.  A  New    LATIN    DELECTUS,   Extracts  from   Classical 

Authors,  with  Vocabularies  and  Explanatory  Notes         .     Is. 

2.  C^ESAE'S   COMMENTAEIES  on  the  GALLIC  WAE; 

with  Grammatical  and  Explanatory  Notes  in  English, 
and  a  Geographical  Index 2s. 

3.  COENELIUS  NEPOS ;  with  English  Notes,  &c.       .        .     Is. 

4.  VIEGIL.    The  Georgics,  Bucolics,  and  doubtful  Works; 

with  English  Notes Is. 

5.  VIEGIL'S  jtENEID  (on  the  same  plan  as  the  preceding)   .    2s. 

6.  HOEACE.     Odea  and  Epodes ;  with  English  Notes,  and 

Analysis  and  Explanation  of  the  Metres          .         .  .     Is.. 

7.  HOEACE.  Satires  and  Epistles ;  with  English  Notes,  &c.  Is.  6d. 

8.  SALLUST.    Conspiracy  of  Catiline,  Jugurthine  War  .  Is.  6^. 

9.  TEEENCE.    Andrea  and  Heautontimorumenos         .  Is.  6oL 

10.  TEEENCE.     Phormio,  Adelphi,  and  Hecyra     .         .         .2s. 

14.  CICESO.    De  Amicitia,  de  Senectute,  and  Brutus     .        .    2s. 

16.  LIYY.    Books  i.  to  v.  in  two  parts 3s. 

17.  LIYY.    Books  xxi.  and  xxii.       .         .         .         .         .         .     Is. 

19.  Selections  from  TIBULLUS,  OVID,  and  PEOPEETIUS  .    2s. 

20.  Selections  from  SUETONIUS  and  the  later  Latin  Writers  .    2s.. 

Preparing  for  Press. 

11.  CICEEO.    Orations  against  Catiline,  for  Sulla,  for  Archias, 

and  for  the  Manilian  Law. 

12.  CICEEO.    First  and  Second  Philippics ;  Orations  for  Milo, 

for  Marcellus,  &c. 

13.  CICEEO.    De  Officiis. 

15.  JUVENAL  and  PEESIUS.     (The  indelicate  passages  ex- 

punged.) 

18.  TACITUS.    Agricola  ;  Germania ;  and  Annals,.  Book  i. 


VIRTUE  BROTHERS  &  CO.,  1,  AMEN 


GREEK  AND  LATIN  CLASSICS.  11 

GREEK    SERIES, 

ON   A  SIMILAR  PLAN   TO   THE    LATIN   SERIES. 

1.  INTRODUCTORY  GREEK   READER.      On  the  same 

plan  as  the  Latin  Reader .1.5. 

2.  XENOPHON.     Anabasis,  i.  ii.  iii Is. 

3.  XENOPHON.     Anabasis,  iv.  v.  vi.  vii Is. 

4.  LUCIAN.     Select  Dialogues Is. 

5.  HOMER.     Iliad,  i.  to  vi Is.  ML 

6.  HOMER.     Iliad,  vii.  to  xii Is.  Qd. 

7.  HOMER.     Iliad,  xiii.  to  xviii Is,  Qd. 

8.  HOMER.     Iliad,  xix.  to  xxiv Is.  Qd. 

9.  HOMER.     Odyssey,  i.  to  vi Is.  Gd. 

10.  HOMER.     Odyssey,  vii.  to  xii Is.  6d. 

11.  HOMER.     Odyssey,  xiii.  to  xviii Is.  6d. 

12.  HOMER.     Odyssey,  xix.  to  xiiv. ;  and  Hymns  .         .         .     2s. 

13.  PLATO.    Apology,  Crito,  and  Pha:do         .        ...    2s. 

14.  HERODOTUS,  iTii Is.  6<Z. 

15.  HERODOTUS,  iii.  iv Is.  6d. 

16.  HERODOTUS,  v.  vi.  and  part  of  vii.  .        .        .       Is.  6d. 

17.  HERODOTUS.     Remainder  of  vii.  viii.  and  ix.  .         .       Is,  6d. 

18.  SOPHOCLES;  CEdipus  Rex Is. 

20.  SOPHOCLES;  Antigone 2s. 

23,  24.  EURIPIDES  ;  Hecuba  and  Medea        .        .        .       Is.  M. 

26.  EURIPIDES;  Alcestis Is. 

30.  ^SCHYLUS;  Prometheus  Vinctus Is. 

41.  THUCYDIDES,  i U. 

Preparing  for  Press. 

19.  SOPHOCLES;  CEdipus  Colonrcus. 

21.  SOPHOCLES ;  Ajax. 

22.  SOPHOCLES;  Philoctetes. 
25.  EURIPIDES;  Hippolytus. 

27.  EURIPIDES;  Orestes. 

28.  EURIPIDES.    Extracts  from  the  remaining  plays. 

29.  SOPHOCLES.     Extracts  from  the  remaining  plays. 
3L  ^SCHYLUS ;  Persrc. 

32.  yESCHYLUS  ;  Septem  contra  Thebes. 

33.  .ESCHYLUS;  Choephorse- 

34.  ^SCHYLUS ;  Eumenides. 

35.  /ESCHYLUS;  Agamemnon. 

36.  AESCHYLUS ;  Supplices. 

37.  PLUTARCH ;  Select  Lives. 

38.  ARISTOPHANES;  Clouds. 

39.  ARISTOPHANES ;  Frogs. 

40.  ARISTOPHANES ;  Selections  from  the  remaining  Comedies. 

42.  THUCYDIDES,  ii. 

43.  THEOCRITUS  ;  Select  Idyls. 

44.  PINDAR, 

45.  ISOCRATES. 

46.  HESIOD. 

VIRTUE  BROTHERS  &  CO.,  1,  AMEN  CORNER- 


12  EDUCATIONAL  WORKS. 


IE  PAGE'S  FRENCH  COURSE. 

"The  sale  of  many  thousands,  and  the  almost  universal  adoption  of  these 
clever  little  books  by  M.  LE  PAGE,  sufficiently  prove  the  public  approbation 
of  his  plan  of  teaching  French,  which  is  in  accordance  with  the  natural 
operation  of  a  child  learning  its  native  language." 

LE  PAGE'S  FRENCH  SCHOOL.  Part  I.  L'ECHO  DE  PARIS; 
being  a  Selection  of  Familiar  Phrases  which  a  person  would  hear  daily 
if  living  in  France.  Price  3s.  6d.  cloth. 

LE  PAGE'S  FRENCH  SCHOOL.  Part  II.  THE  GIFT  OF  FLUENCY 
IN  FRENCH  CONVERSATION.  With  Notes.  Price  2s.  6d.  cloth. 

LE  PAGE'S  FRENCH  SCHOOL.  PART  III.  THE  LAST  STEP 
TO  FRENCH;  with  the  Versification.  Price  2s.  6d.  cloth. 

LE  PAGE'S  FRENCH  MASTER  FOR  BEGINNERS  ;  or,  EASY  LESSONS 
IN  FRENCH.  Price  2s.  6d.  cloth. 

LE  PAGE'S  PETIT  CAUSEUR ;  or,  FIRST  CHATTE RINGS  IN  FRENCH. 
Being  a  Key  to  the  Gift  of  French  Conversation.  Price  Is.  6d. 

LE  PAGE'S  NICETIES  OF  PARISIAN  PRONUNCIATION.     Price  6d. 

LE  PAGE'S  JUVENILE  TREASURY  OF  FRENCH  CONVERSATION. 
With  the  English  before  the  French.  Price  3s.  cloth. 

LE  PAGE'S  KEY  TO  L'ECHO  DE  PARIS.     Price  Is. 

LE  PAGE'S  FRENCH  PROMPTER.  A  HANDBOOK  FOR  TRAVELLERS 
on  the  Continent  and  Students  at  Home.  Price  4s.  cloth. 

LE  PAGE'S  READY  GUIDE  TO  FRENCH  COMPOSITION.  FRENCH 
Grammar  by  Examples,  giving  Models  as  Leading-strings  throughout 
Accidence  and  Syntax.  Price  3s.  6d.  cloth. 


Fifth  Edition,  improved  and  corrected,  in  1  vol.  12rno.,  neatly 
bound,  price  2s.  6cL, 

TATE'S  ELEMENTS  OF  COMMERCIAL  ARITHMETIC ; 

Containing  a  Minute  Investigation  of  the  Principles  of  the  Science,  and 
their  general  application  to  Commercial  Calculations,  in  accordance 
with  the  present  Monetary  System  of  the  World.  By  WILLIAM  TATE, 
Principal  of  the  City  of  London  Establishment  for  finishing  Young 
Men  for  Mercantile  and  Banking  Pursuits. 

KEY  TO  THE  ABOVE,  12mo.,  bound,  3s.  6d. 


VIRTUE  BROTHERS  £  CO.,  I,  AMEN  CORNER. 


RETURN     CIRCULATION  DEPARTMENT 

TO—  +>      202  Main  Library 

LOAN  PERIOD  1 
HOME  USE 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 

1-month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  catling  642-3405 

1-year  loans  may  be  recharged  by  banging  the  books  to  the  Circulation  Desk 


DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 

JAN    4  1988 

rrr  pirn    nFP  -i  fi 

10  or 

RES  IIHU    UE.V  X  6 

iyob 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA,  BERKEI 
FORM  NO.  DD6,  60m,  I  783         BERKELEY,  CA  94720 

Berkeley 


YA  oi  so; 


GENERAL  LIBRARY -U.C.  BERKELEY 


Boooa3t,sen 


TR 


(.  'v 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY